project manual – volume 2 of 3 architectural

214 North Duke Street, Lancaster, Pennsylvania 17602 P 717.393.3211 / F 717.393.3212 www.marottamain.com

PROJECT MANUAL – VOLUME 2 of 3 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS DORMITORY RENOVATIONS AT THE BRANCH CAMPUS THADDEUS STEVENS COLLEGE OF TECHNOLOGY 1100 E. Orange Street, Lancaster, PA 17602 for Thaddeus Stevens College of Technology 750 East King Street, Lancaster, PA 17602 16 December, 2019

19-TS-02 Dormitory Renovations at the Branch Campus THADDEUS STEVENS COLLEGE OF TECHNOLOGY

MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS INDEX 1 of 4

SPECIFICATION INDEX

DORMITORY RENOVATIONS AT THE BRANCH CAMPUS

THADDEUS STEVENS COLLEGE OF TECHNOLOGY

SECTION NO. SECTION TITLE NO. OF PAGES

VOLUME 1 – LEGAL SPECIFICATIONS

Specification Index 4

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS PROJECT INFORMATION 00 01 01 Project Title Page 00 01 01 2 00 01 15 List of Drawing Sheets 00 01 15 2 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 00 11 13 Advertisement to Bid 00 11 13 2 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders 00 21 13 1

A701 Instructions to Bidders (AIA Document #A701-2018) A701 13 Appendix A Scoring Matrix for Bidder’s Qualifications Appendix A 3 RFI RFI Request Form RFI 1

00 25 13 Pre-Bid Meeting 00 25 13 2 00 26 00 Procurement Substitution Procedures 00 26 00 2

SR Substitution Request (Prior to Bidding) SR 2 00 31 13 Preliminary Schedule 00 31 13 1 00 31 19 Existing Condition Information 00 31 19 1 00 31 26 Existing Hazardous Material Information 00 31 26 1 Asbestos Log, Unit A 39 Asbestos Log, Unit B 55 00 31 43 Permit Application 00 31 43 1 CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT COC-SC Conditions of the Contract - Special Conditions COC-SC 7

PWEVF Public Works Employment Verification Form PWEVF 1 PWD Prevailing Wages Determination PWD 11 CY 113 PA Child Abuse History Clearance Form CY 113 3 ACT 114 ACT 114 Fingerprinting Report ACT 114 1 SP-4-164 Request or Criminal Record Check Form (ACT 34) SP-4-164 1 PDE-6004 PDE-6004 Arrest/Conviction Report & Certification Form PDE-6004 3

00 41 16 Bid Form – Stipulated Sum (Multiple-Prime Contract) 00 41 16 3 00 43 22 Unit Prices Form 00 43 22 2 00 43 23 Alternates Form 00 43 23 2 A310 Bid Bond Form (AIA Document A310-2010) A310 2 00 43 24 Non-Collusion Affidavit of Prime Bidder Attachment to the Bid Form 00 43 24 1 00 43 25 Agreement of Surety Attachment to the Bid Form 00 43 25 1 A305 Contractor’s Qualification Statement (AIA Document A305-1986) A305 4 00 43 93 Bid Submittal Checklist 00 43 93 1 A201 General Conditions (AIA Document A201-2017) A201 51 A101 Agreement: (Refer to AIA Document A101-2017) Standard Form of A101 8 Agreement Between Owner & Contractor 00 61 13 Payment Bond 00 61 13 2 00 61 13.13 Performance Bond 00 61 13.13 2

MBF Maintenance Bond Form MBF 1

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 Contract Summary 01 10 00 5 01 12 00 Multiple Contract Summary 01 12 00 9 01 21 00 Unit Cost Allowances 01 21 00 4



01 22 00 Unit Prices 01 22 00 4 01 23 00 Alternates Form 01 23 00 2 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 25 00 3 PC/SR Substitution Request (After Bidding) PC/SR 3 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 01 26 00 2 01 29 00 Payment Procedures 01 29 00 4 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 9 RFI RFI Request Form RFI 1 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 01 32 00 9 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation 01 32 33 2 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 10 01 35 16 Alteration Project Procedures 01 35 16 6 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 40 00 9 01 42 00 References 01 42 00 16 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 10 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 60 00 5 01 73 00 Execution 01 73 00 10 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 01 74 19 2 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 01 77 00 6 CSI Form Punch List - CSI Form 14.1A CSI Form 1 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 23 8 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 01 78 39 4 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training 01 79 00 5

VOLUME 2 – ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19 Selective Demolition 02 41 19 6

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 03 30 53 Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 53 5 03 54 16 Hydraulic Cement Underlayment 03 54 16 3

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 04 20 00 10

DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 7 05 31 00 Steel Decking 05 31 00 4 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 6 05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings 05 52 13 7 05 53 19 Expanded Metal Gratings 05 53 19 5

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 10 53 6 06 16 00 Sheathing 06 16 00 3 06 40 23 Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 6

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 21 00 3 07 53 23 Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing 07 53 23 11 07 81 00 Applied Fireproofing 07 81 00 6 07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping 07 84 13 6 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 07 92 00 7

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 08 01 52.61 Wood Window Repairs 08 01 52.61 8 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 13 7 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 5 08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 41 13 9 08 71 00 Door Hardware (hardware schedule to be issued by addendum) 08 71 00 10 08 80 00 Glazing 08 80 00 9



08 88 13 Fire-Rated Glazing 08 88 13 4

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 21 16.23 Gypsum Board shaft Wall Assemblies 09 21 16.23 3 09 22 16 Non Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 5 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 09 29 00 6 09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling 09 30 13 9 09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 8 09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories 09 65 13 5 09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring 09 65 19 5 09 67 00 Fluid Applied Flooring 09 67 00 6 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting 09 68 13 6 09 91 23 Interior Painting 09 91 23 9

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 11 00 Visual Display Units 10 11 00 5 10 14 23.16 Room Identification Panel Signage 10 14 23.16 6

ANSI ICC A117.1-2009 Chapter 7 Communication Elements and Features 7 10 21 13.19 Plastic Toilet Compartments 10 21 13.19 4 10 26 00 Wall and Door Protection 10 26 00 4 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories 10 28 00 5

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 12 24 13 Roller Shades 12 24 13 5 12 35 53 Manufactured Plastic-Laminate-Clad Casework 12 35 53 9 12 36 61.16 Solid Surfacing Countertops 12 36 61.16 4

VOLUME 3 – PLUMBING, HVAC, ELECTRICAL & SITE SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 20 – GENERAL PROVISIONS 20 00 10 General Provisions - Mechanical 20 00 10 11 20 00 20 General Provisions - Electrical 20 00 20 11

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 10 10 Fire Protection 21 10 10 2

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 05 05 Plumbing Basic Materials 22 05 05 5 22 05 10 Plumbing Pipe and Pipe Fittings 22 05 10 6 22 05 15 Plumbing Piping Specialties 22 05 15 4 22 05 20 Plumbing Specialties 22 05 20 5 22 05 25 Plumbing Valves 22 05 25 4 22 05 30 Plumbing Hangers and Supports 22 05 30 3 22 07 10 Plumbing Insulation 22 07 10 3 22 11 10 Plumbing Pumps 22 11 10 2 22 13 10 Sanitary Drainage 22 13 10 4 22 33 10 Water Heaters 22 33 10 2 22 40 10 Plumbing Fixtures 22 40 10 6 22 60 30 Fuel Gas Piping and Specialties 22 60 30 2 22 96 10 Wiring of Plumbing Equipment 22 96 10 2

DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING 23 05 05 HVAC Basic Materials 23 05 05 7 23 05 15 HVAC Piping Specialties 23 05 15 9 23 05 25 HVAC Valves 23 05 25 5 23 05 30 HVAC Supports and Anchors 23 05 30 4 23 05 35 HVAC Sound and Vibration Control 23 05 35 5 23 07 10 HVAC Insulation 23 07 10 8 23 09 10 Building Automation System 23 09 10 16 23 10 20 Variable Frequency Drives 23 10 20 4 23 21 10 HVAC Pumps 23 21 10 4 23 30 10 Air Distribution 23 30 10 7 23 34 10 Fans and Gravity Ventilators 23 34 10 4



23 57 10 Heat Transfer 23 57 10 7 23 72 10 Energy Recovery 23 72 10 6 23 81 10 Unitary Equipment 23 81 10 5 23 82 10 Terminal Heating Units 23 82 10 2 23 95 10 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of HVAC System 23 95 10 5 23 96 10 Wiring of HVAC Equipment 23 96 10 3

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 05 05 Basic Materials 26 05 05 9 26 05 20 Wire and Cable, 600 Volts and Below 26 05 20 8 26 05 30 Raceways and Fittings 26 05 30 11 26 05 40 Boxes 26 05 40 5 26 05 50 Wiring Devices 26 05 50 5 26 05 60 Grounding Systems 26 05 60 2 26 24 30 Panelboards 26 24 30 3 26 24 40 Disconnect Switches 26 24 40 2 26 24 50 Overcurrent Protective Devices 26 24 50 4 26 50 10 Lighting 26 50 10 3 26 50 50 Lighting Controls 26 50 50 4 26 90 10 Controls and Instrumentation 26 90 10 2 26 96 10 Wiring of Mechanical Equipment 26 96 10 4

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 15 Common Requirements – Telecommunications Systems 27 05 15 4 27 05 25 Grounding and Bonding for Telecommunications Systems 27 05 25 4 27 05 30 Pathways for Telecommunications Systems 27 05 30 7 27 11 10 Telecommunications Spaces, Equipment and Fittings 27 11 10 10 27 13 10 Backbone Cabling - Telecommunications Systems 27 13 10 5 27 15 10 Horizontal Distribution Cabling - Telecommunications Systems 27 15 10 6 27 15 45 Faceplates and Connectors - Telecommunications Systems 27 15 45 5 27 16 10 Connection Cords, Devices and Adapters - Telecommunications Systems 27 16 10 4 27 19 10 Telecommunications Cable Systems Testing – Copper 27 19 10 4 27 19 20 Telecommunications Cable Systems Testing – Fiber 27 19 20 5 27 60 10 Telecommunications Cable Systems Identification and Documentation 27 60 10 4

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 00 00 Site Clearing 31 00 00 4 31 20 00 Earthwork 31 20 00 10

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 12 16 Asphalt Paving 32 12 16 7 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 32 13 13 12 32 13 73 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 32 13 73 5 32 92 00 Turf and Grasses 32 92 00 10 END OF INDEX


MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 1 of 6

SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.

2. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. 3. Section 01 35 16 "Alteration Project Procedures" for general protection and work procedures for

alteration projects.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Following confirmation with the Owner demolition waste shall become the property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. It is not anticipated that Historic items are to be located, however if they are found the Owner should be notified and carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective

demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. There will be no availability of use of elevator, stairs within the Area of Work will be the only vertical

access. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial

occupancy of completed Work.

C. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Comply with Section 01 32 33 "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins.

D. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: a. Asbestos Abatement will occur ahead of this work.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.



1.10 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties include the following:

1. Firestone Roofing installed in 2012 carries 20 year warranty.

B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.

C. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations.

D. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs or video.

1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 32 33 "Photographic Documentation." 2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs or video

of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated

in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.



1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary

services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug

remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible

piping material and leave in place. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean,

and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment

and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining

ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in

Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least twenty-four (24) hours after flame-cutting operations. 6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.



7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site.

8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.

9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

B. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and

equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.

B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts.

C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove.

3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and recycle or dispose of them according to Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris

to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and

Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.



3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.

END OF SECTION 02 41 19


MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS

- 1 of 12

SECTION 02751 - CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following: 1. Ramps and stairs

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete.

1.2 UNIT PRICES AND QUANTITY ALLOWANCES

A. Refer to Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for schedule and description of unit prices and quantity allowances pertaining to concrete sidewalks, and for related administrative and procedural requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to concrete paving, including but not limited to, the

following: a. Concrete mixture design. b. Quality control of concrete materials and concrete paving construction practices.

2. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with concrete paving to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete paving Subcontractor.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.

B. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials complies with requirements:

1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.



- 2 of 12

3. Admixtures. 4. Curing compounds. 5. Applied finish materials. 6. Joint fillers.

D. Qualification Data: For installer and manufacturer testing agency.

E. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer of ready-mix concrete manufacturer and testing agency.

B. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. 8. Joint fillers.

C. Material Test Reports: For each of the following: 1. Aggregates: Include service-record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete

due to alkali-aggregate reactivity.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant Certification Checklist").

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

C. Concrete Testing Service: Engage in a qualified testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

D. Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to concrete paving, including but not limited to, the following:

a. Concrete mixture design. b. Quality control of concrete materials and concrete paving construction practices.

2. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with concrete paving to attend, including the following:



- 3 of 12

a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete paving subcontractor.

F. Preconstruction Testing

1. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete paving mixtures.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

B. Cold-Weather Concrete Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the following:

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical

accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.

C. Hot-Weather Concrete Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap, so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

D. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed pavement work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.

F. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from one source.

G. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents.

H. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to design concrete mixes.

I. Concrete Standards: Pennsylvania Department of Transportation (PaDOT) Publication 408, dated 1994 (Hereafter referred to as PaDOT Pub. 408).

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.



- 4 of 12

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMING PRODUCTS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Recycled Content: Provide steel reinforcement with an average recycled content of steel so combined pre- and post-consumer recycled content is not less than 90 percent.

B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from galvanized steel wire into flat sheets.

C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.

D. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A, plain steel.

E. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.

F. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class II zinc coated, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and bending; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed bars.

G. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed bars.

H. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars; assembled with clips.

I. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, galvanized.

J. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496/A 496M.

K. Epoxy-Coated-Steel Wire: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated, plain.

L. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 plain-steel bars; zinc coated (galvanized) after fabrication according to ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class I coating. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

M. Epoxy-Coated, Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars.

N. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

O. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A, internally and externally threaded. Design hook-bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against paving form and in position during concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt.

P. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified, and as follows:



- 5 of 12

1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.

2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

Q. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating, compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement.

R. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. General: Use the same brand and type of cementitious material from the same manufacturer throughout the Project.

B. Portland Cement: PaDOT Pub. 408, Section 701.

C. Fly Ash: PaDOT Pub. 408, Section 724.2(b).

D. Normal-Weight Aggregates: PaDOT Pub. 408, Section 703.1 and 703.2 and as follows. Provide aggregates from a single source. Product and source are also required to be currently approved by PaDOT.

1. Fine Aggregates: Type A per PaDOT Pub. 408, Sections 703.1. 2. Coarse Aggregates: Type A, AASHTO No. 57 per PaDOT Pub. 408, Section 703.2. 3. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing substances that cause spalling.

E. Water: Potable and per PaDOT Pub. 408, Section 720.

2.4 ADMIXTURES

A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures.

B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.

D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.

E. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.

F. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. Do not use for colored concrete.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. Acceptable manufacturers include but are not limited to the following:



- 6 of 12

1. W. R. Meadows. 2. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 3. The Euclid Chemical Company.

E. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, VOC-compliant, wax free, non-yellowing, minimum 25% solids. Acceptable manufacturers include but are not limited to the following:

1. W. R. Meadows. 2. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 3. Sonneborn, Div. of Degussa Building Systems 4. The Euclid Chemical Company.

2.6 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: Pre-formed resilient bituminous per AASHTO M 213, except as modified by PaDOT Pub. 408, Section 705, thickness as indicated.

B. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881/C 881M, two-component epoxy resin capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces; of class suitable for application temperature, of grade complying with requirements, and of the following types:

1. Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

E. Chemical Surface Retarder: Water-soluble, liquid, set retarder with color dye, for horizontal concrete surface application, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of concrete to a depth of 1/8 to 1/4 inch.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. ChemMasters; Exposee. b. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Delay S. c. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Etch (J-73). d. Edoco by Dayton Superior; True Etch Surface Retarder. e. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Surface Retarder Formula S. f. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Expose. g. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; TOP-STOP. h. Metalcrete Industries; Surftard. i. Nox-Crete Products Group; CRETE-NOX TA. j. Scofield, L. M. Company; LITHOTEX Top Surface Retarder. k. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Rugasol-S. l. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Etch. m. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-6000 Concrete Surface Retarder. n. Unitex; TOP-ETCH Surface Retarder. o. Vexcon Chemicals Inc.; Certi-Vex Envioset.

F. Rock Salt: Sodium chloride crystals, kiln dried, coarse gradation with 100 percent passing 3/8-inch sieve and 85 percent retained on a No. 8 sieve.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=5177&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456790659&mf=04&src=wd

















- 7 of 12

2.7 CONCRETE MIXES

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience. Methods as specified in ACI PaDOT Bulletin No. 5.

B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the trial batch method.

C. Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): Class A, 4000 psi for all applications unless indicated otherwise. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches for Class A concrete.

D. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.

E. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus or minus 1.0 percent:

1. Air Content: 6.0 percent for 1-inch maximum aggregate.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94, except as modified by PaDOT Pub. 408, Section 704.

1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Proof-roll prepared subgrade and base course surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional compaction. Proceed with pavement only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.

B. Remove loose material from compacted base surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.



- 8 of 12


A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement and with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

3.4 JOINTS

A. General: Construct construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless pavement terminates at isolation joints.

1. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. 3. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially

hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Isolation & Expansion Joints: Form isolation/expansion joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Locate 3/8" expansion joints at intervals of 20 feet in curbing and 10 feet in flatwork, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint sealant

is indicated. 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-

filler sections together. 6. Sealed Isolation/Expansion Joints: Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with

temporary preformed plastic cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. Prepare substrates, prime, and install sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s written instructions. Provide sealed isolation joints at the following locations:

a. Joints between walkways and existing building overhang/columns.

D. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

E. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints in flatwork as shown on Drawings (maximum of 6 feet o/c for 4-inch thick slabs) after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints (For Concrete Curbing Only): Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 3/16-inch-wide joints into concrete when



- 9 of 12

cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks. Curb contraction joints to be 2" deep at a maximum of 10 feet o/c.

3. Saw cutting of concrete walks is not permitted.

F. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 1/4 inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcement steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from base surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten base to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment.

D. Comply with requirements and with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete, except as modified by PaDOT Pub. 408, Section 704.

E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

F. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete according to recommendations in ACI 309R.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.

G. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations.

H. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1, except as modified by PaDOT Pub. 408, Section 704, and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical

accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.

I. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R, except as modified by PaDOT Pub. 408, Section 704, and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover reinforcement steel with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, reinforcement steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.



- 10 of 12

3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. General: Wetting of concrete surfaces during screeding, initial floating, or finishing operations is prohibited.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Light-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface

perpendicular to line of traffic, or as otherwise specified on the Plan, to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and follow recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

D. Curing Methods: Except as indicated otherwise for special concrete finishes, cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and

edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing

concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. Do not use for colored concrete.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

E. Contractor shall provide the Owner with written instructions pertaining to the acceptable or unacceptable de-icing agents and materials, including time restrictions, to be applied to new concrete pavements.

3.8 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 1/4 inch. 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot-long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/8 inch. 4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch. 5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch. 6. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch.



- 11 of 12

7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches.

8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency:

1. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article.

2. Contractor may engage and pay for a qualified Testing Agency to perform additional quality control testing as deemed necessary by the Contractor to ensure the Work complies with the Contract Documents.

B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 50 cu. yds. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test 1 specimen at 7 days and 2 specimens at 28 days.

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from 2 specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.

C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Construction Manager, Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as the sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.

G. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.



- 12 of 12

H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.10 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet requirements in this Section.

B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.

END OF SECTION 02751


MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 30 53- 1 of 5

SECTION 03 30 53 - MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.


1. Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 2. Section 32 13 13 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.


A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. Comply with the following sections of ACI 301 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. "General Requirements." 2. "Formwork and Formwork Accessories." 3. "Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports." 4. "Concrete Mixtures." 5. "Handling, Placing, and Constructing."

B. Comply with ACI 117.


A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

C. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.



03 30 53- 2 of 5

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33/C 33M, 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.

F. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.

2.4 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 15 mils thick; or plastic sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class C.

B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

B. Water: Potable.

2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Comply with ACI 301.

B. Normal-Weight Concrete:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days (4000 psi at 28 days for exterior concrete). 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: In compliance with C1602. 3. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, slag cement, and blended hydraulic cement as needed

to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent.

4. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 5. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301. Do not allow air content of trowel-finished

interior floor slabs to exceed 3 percent. 6. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301. 6 percent for exterior concrete.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and furnish batch ticket information.



03 30 53- 3 of 5

1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.

1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.

2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd.

3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

3.3 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Install, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.

1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive or joint tape.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.



03 30 53- 4 of 5

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Comply with ACI 301 for placing concrete.

B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.

C. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.

3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/2 inch.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following rubbed finish, defined in ACI 301, to smooth-formed-finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

1. Smooth-rubbed finish.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.8 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on surface.

1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations.

C. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finishes unless otherwise indicated.

D. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, fluid-applied or direct-to-deck-applied membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

E. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system.

F. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset methods. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.



03 30 53- 5 of 5

G. Slip-Resistive Broom Finish: Apply a slip-resistive finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.

3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 305.1 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

C. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT

03 54 16 - 1 of 3

SECTION 03 54 16 - HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Polymer-modified, self-leveling, hydraulic cement underlayment for application below interior floor coverings.

1.3 ALLOWANCES

A. Provide hydraulic cement underlayment as part of Unit cost allowance for underlayment.

1.4 UNIT PRICES

A. Work of this Section is affected by underlayment unit price.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Hydraulic cement underlayment. 2. Reinforcement. 3. Primer.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products required for this Project.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance.

1. Place hydraulic cement underlayments only when ambient temperature and temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F.



03 54 16 - 2 of 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.2 HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENTS

A. Hydraulic Cement Underlayment: Polymer-modified, self-leveling, hydraulic cement product that can be applied in minimum uniform thickness of 1/4 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ARDEX Americas. b. MAPEI Corporation. c. USG Corporation.

2. Cement Binder: ASTM C150/C150M, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined by ASTM C219.

3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C109/C109M.

B. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch; or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for underlayment thickness required.

C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F.

D. Reinforcement: For underlayment applied to wood substrates, provide galvanized metal lath or other corrosion-resistant reinforcement recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.

E. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.

2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.

B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.

1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1000 sq. ft. , and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test, ASTM F1869: Proceed with installation only after substrates

do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1250&mf=04&src=wd#http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1250&mf=04&src=wd



03 54 16 - 3 of 3

b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 85 percent relative humidity level measurement, or as recommended by hydraulic cement underlayment manufacturer.

C. Wood Substrates: Mechanically fasten loose boards and panels to eliminate substrate movement and squeaks. Sand to remove coatings that might impair underlayment bond and remove sanding dust.

1. Install underlayment reinforcement recommended in writing by manufacturer.

D. Nonporous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove waxes, sealants, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond, and prepare surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Mix and install underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment installation and for time period after installation recommended in writing by manufacturer.

2. Coordinate installation of components to provide optimum adhesion to substrate and between coats. 3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through

underlayment.

B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Install underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.

1. Install a final layer without aggregate to product surface. 2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during installation and curing processes.

E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.

F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.

3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between gypsum cement underlayment surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch and 1/16 inch in 2 feet.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 1 of 10

SECTION 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Concrete building brick. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Steel reinforcing bars. 5. Masonry-joint reinforcement. 6. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

B. Products Installed but not Furnished under This Section:

1. Steel lintels in unit masonry.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing" for installing anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural steel frame.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.






A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units. a. Include data on material properties. b. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing average

net-area compressive strength of units. 2. Integral water repellent used in CMUs. 3. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type. 4. Mortar admixtures. 5. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 6. Reinforcing bars. 7. Joint reinforcement.



8. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C109/C109M for compressive strength, ASTM C1506 for water retention, and ASTM C91/C91M for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.

C. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

D. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls, and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a

minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe, and hold cover in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral

finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar

and dirt onto completed masonry.

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.



1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.


A. Provide unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days.

1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

2. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C1314.

2.3 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work and will be within 20 feet vertically and horizontally of a walking surface.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated.

1. Where fire-resistance-rated construction is indicated, units shall be listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.4 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

B. CMUs: ASTM C90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2800 psi.

2. Density Classification: Normal weight unless otherwise indicated. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 4. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's sample.



5. Faces to Receive Plaster: Where units are indicated to receive a direct application of plaster, provide textured-face units made with gap-graded aggregates.

C. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C55.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 3750 psi.

2. Density Classification: Normal weight. 3. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 3-5/8 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long.

2.5 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS

A. General: Provide one of the following:

B. Concrete Lintels: ASTM C1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density classification; and with reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area compressive strength not less than that of CMUs.

2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

1. Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to ASTM C114.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.

D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.

E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404.

F. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C494/C494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BASF Corporation. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. c. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.

G. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ACM Chemistries. b. BASF Corporation. c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. d. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.

H. Water: Potable.

2.7 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M or ASTM A996/A996M, Grade 60.





B. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A951/A951M.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.187-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.187-inch diameter. 5. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.

C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Wire-Bond.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D226/D226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

2.9 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; a Hohmann & Barnard company. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. PROSOCO, Inc.

2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar. 4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar. 5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless

of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S Type N. 3. For interior nonload-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476.





1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C476, paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C143/C143M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair mortar bond.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.

G. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested according to ASTM C67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch

in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:



1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet or 1/2-inch maximum.

7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.

2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4

inch. 4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do

not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch. 5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than

1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.

H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

I. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.



2. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Section 07 84 43 "Joint Firestopping."

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay CMUs as follows:

1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where cells are not

grouted. 5. Fully bed units and fill cells with mortar at anchors and ties as needed to fully embed anchors and ties

in mortar.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Lay structural clay tile as follows:

1. Lay vertical-cell units with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. Provide bed joints with full mortar coverage on face shells and webs.

2. Lay horizontal-cell units with full bed joints unless otherwise indicated. Keep drainage channels, if any, free of mortar. Form head joints with sufficient mortar so excess will be squeezed out as units are placed in position. Butter both sides of units to be placed, or butter one side of unit already in place and one side of unit to be placed.

3. Maintain joint thicknesses indicated except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with 1/4- to 3/8-inch- thick joints.

D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches

beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE

A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete, to comply with the following:



1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally.

3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install control- and expansion-joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:

1. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete for application of sealant.

C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows:

1. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

3.9 LINTELS

A. Install steel lintels where indicated.

B. Provide lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick-size units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.

C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

1. as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

3.10 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than.

3.11 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.



B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison

purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid

strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces

thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 6. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A. 7. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 8. Clean stone trim to comply with stone supplier's written instructions. 9. Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook."

3.12 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill

material is specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.

C. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for recycling.

D. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 1 of 7

SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel. 2. Shrinkage-resistant grout.


1. Section 05 31 00 "Steel Decking" connection to structural steel. 2. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to structural-steel

frame miscellaneous steel fabrications and other steel items not defined as structural steel. 3. Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting" for painting requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in ANSI/AISC 303.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.




A. Product Data:

1. Structural-steel materials. 2. Shop primer. 3. Galvanized-steel primer. 4. Etching cleaner. 5. Galvanized repair paint. 6. Shrinkage-resistant grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings.



3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.

5. Identify members not to be shop primed.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer fabricator professional engineer testing agency.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

D. Mill test reports for structural-steel materials, including chemical and physical properties.

E. Product Test Reports: For the following:

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers, including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct-tension indicators.

F. Survey of existing conditions.

G. Source quality-control reports.

H. Field quality-control reports.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified with a minimum of 5 years experience with projects of similar size and scope. Provide references.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified with a minimum of 5 years experience with projects of similar size and scope. Provide references.

C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified in accordance with AISC's Sophisticated Paint or to SSPC-QP 3.

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8/D1.8M. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification.


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers.

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.



3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade F1852 bolt assemblies and for retesting bolt assemblies after lubrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. ANSI/AISC 303. 2. ANSI/AISC 341. 3. ANSI/AISC 360. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts."

2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A572/A572M, Grade 50.

B. Channels, Angles, M-Shapes, S-Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A36/A36M.

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B structural tubing.

E. Corrosion-Resisting (Weathering), Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A847/A847M structural tubing.

F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.

1. Weight Class: Standard. 2. Finish: Black.

G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.3 FORGED-STEEL STRUCTURAL HARDWARE

A. Made from cold-finished carbon-steel bars, ASTM A108, AISI C-1035.

B. Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon-steel bars, ASTM A108, AISI C-1030.

C. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon-steel bars, ASTM A108, AISI C-1018.

2.4 PRIMER

A. Steel Primer:

1. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

a. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

B. Galvanized-Steel Primer: MPI#26.

1. Etching Cleaner: MPI#25, for galvanized steel. 2. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A780/A780M.



2.5 SHRINKAGE-RESISTANT GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate in accordance with ANSI/AISC 303 and to ANSI/AISC 360.

1. Identify high-strength structural steel in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M and maintain markings until structural-steel framing has been erected.

2. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 3. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming

operations.

B. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

C. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

D. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted in accordance with SSPC-SP 3.

E. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in ANSI/AISC 303 for mill material.

2.8 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches.

2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces unless indicated to be painted.

B. Surface Preparation of Steel: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the following specifications and standards:

1. SSPC-SP 3. 2. SSPC-SP 7 (WAB)/NACE WAB-4. 3. SSPC-SP 14 (WAB)/NACE WAB-8. 4. SSPC-SP 11.



5. SSPC-SP 6 (WAB)/NACE WAB-3. 6. SSPC-SP 10 (WAB)/NACE WAB-2. 7. SSPC-SP 5 (WAB)/NACE WAB-1. 8. SSPC-SP 8.

C. Surface Preparation of Galvanized Steel: Prepare galvanized-steel surfaces for shop priming by thoroughly cleaning steel of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treating with etching cleaner or in accordance with SSPC-SP 16.

D. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color

of second coat to distinguish it from first.

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections.

1. Allow testing agency access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

2. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test shop-bolted connections in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts."

3. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165/E165M. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks

or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94/E94M.

4. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear stud connectors in accordance with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows: a. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or

welding repairs to any shear stud connector. b. Conduct tests in accordance with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear stud

connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear stud connectors already tested. 5. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.



1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction and structural-steel framing until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and in accordance with ANSI/AISC 303 and ANSI/AISC 360.

B. Baseplates Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Pretension anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove

wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack shrinkage-resistant grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates, so no voids

remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for grouting.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within ANSI/AISC 303.

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. Slope roof framing members to slopes indicated on Drawings.

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts" for bolt and joint type specified.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with ANSI/AISC 303 and ANSI/AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding

tolerances in ANSI/AISC 303 for mill material.

3.5 REPAIR

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing, and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform the following special inspections:



1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

1. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections in accordance with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts."

2. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. a. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M

and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1) Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165/E165M. 2) Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.

Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. 3) Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164. 4) Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94/E94M.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS STEEL DECKING 05 31 00 - 1 of 4

SECTION 05 31 00 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Noncomposite formdeck.


1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight and lightweight structural concrete fill over steel deck.

2. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors. 3. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes. 4. Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting of deck.



1. Noncomposite form deck.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.

C. Product Test Reports: For tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements:

1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners.

D. Research Reports: For steel deck, from ICC-ES.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E329 for testing indicated.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."




A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

1. Protect and ventilate acoustical cellular roof deck with factory-installed insulation to maintain insulation free of moisture.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

2.2 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Canam Steel Corporation; Canam Group, Inc. 2. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. 3. Nucor Corp.

B. Noncomposite Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel sheet noncomposite form-deck panels to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel Form Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following:

1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 zinc coating. 2. Profile Depth: As indicated. 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. 4. Span Condition: As indicated. 5. Side Laps: As indicated.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.




F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication No. 31 for overhang and slab depth.

G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A780/A780Mor SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.

H. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

I. Use mechanical fasteners in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DECK

A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by using mechanical fasteners.

1. Screw Size: #12. 2. Screw Spacing: 12” o.c.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of one-half of the span or 36 inches, and as follows:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows:



1. End Joints: Lapped or butted at Contractor's option.

D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Mechanically fasten weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated.

E. Floor-Deck Closures: Mechanically fasten weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck.

3.4 REPAIR

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780/A780M and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Repair Painting:

1. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom surfaces of deck exposed to view.

2. Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of bottom deck surfaces are included in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.



MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 1 of 6

SECTION 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Floor joist framing

B. Related Requirements: 1. Retain subparagraphs below to cross-reference requirements Contractor might expect to find in this

Section but are specified in other Sections. 2. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud framing

and ceiling-suspension assemblies.


A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.


C. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed a qualified testing agency.

1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power-actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners. 5. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.

D. Research Reports: For non-standard cold-formed steel framing, from ICC-ES.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."


A. Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc. 2. California Expanded Metal Products Company. 3. ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc. 4. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division. 5. Craco Mfg., Inc. 6. Custom Stud Inc. 7. Design Shapes in Steel. 8. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company. 9. Formetal Co. Inc. (The). 10. MarinoWARE. 11. Mesker 12. MBA Building Supplies, Inc. 13. Nuconsteel; a Nucor Company. 14. Olmar Supply, Inc. 15. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc. 16. SCAFCO Corporation. 17. Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc. 18. State Building Products, Inc. 19. Steel Construction Systems. 20. Steel Network, Inc. (The). 21. Steel Structural Systems. 22. Steeler, Inc. 23. Super Stud Building Products, Inc. 24. Telling Industries, LLC. 25. United Metal Products, Inc. 26. United Steel Manufacturing.


A. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards:



1. Roof Systems: AISI S210. 2. Wall Studs: AISI S211. 3. Headers: AISI S212. 4. Lateral Design: AISI S213.

B. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with AISI S100 and AISI S200.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows:

1. Grade: ST33H minimum as required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60 or equivalent.

C. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection/Drift Clips: ASTM A 653, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60.

2.4 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING

A. Steel Floor Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, punched with enlarged service holes with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated 2. Flange Width: As indicated 3. Section Properties: As indicated

2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Joist hangers and end closures. 7. Hole reinforcing plates. 8. Backer plates.



2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123.

B. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

C. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

D. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,

pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.

3. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.


A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.

1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.

D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or

riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

H. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings.

I. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:



1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 1 of 6

SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 2. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other

Sections.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast

into concrete or built into unit masonry.


1. Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items built into unit masonry.

2. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing" for steel framing, supports, elevator machine beams, hoist beams, divider beams, door frames, and other steel items attached to the structural-steel framing.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.



1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes. 2. Fasteners. 3. Shop primers. 4. Shrinkage-resisting grout. 5. Prefabricated building columns.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following:

1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.



2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections.

3. Loose steel lintels.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, floor slabs, decks, and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.

C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A786/A786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A36/A36M or ASTM A283/A283M, Grade C or D.

D. Rolled-Stainless Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A793.

E. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325, Type 3, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH3, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and where indicated, flat washers.

D. Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless steel bolts, ASTM F593; with hex nuts, ASTM F594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy.



E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

F. Anchors, General: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E488/E488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

G. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A47/A47M malleable iron or ASTM A27/A27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F2329/F2329M.

H. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy stainless steel bolts, ASTM F593, and nuts, ASTM F594.


A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."

B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

D. Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Factory-packaged, nonmetallic, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

E. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

B. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

C. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness

shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.



E. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

F. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

G. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

H. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

I. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

1. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.

C. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with steel baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top plates for anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as pipe wall thickness unless otherwise indicated.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1/2-inch baseplates with four 5/8-inch anchor bolts and 1/4-inch

top plates.

D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

E. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with manufacturer.

B. Drill for mechanical anchors and countersink. Locate holes not more than 4 inches from ends and not more than 12 inches o.c., evenly spaced between ends, unless otherwise indicated. Provide closer spacing if recommended by manufacturer.

1. Provide two rows of holes for units more than 5 inches wide, with two holes aligned at ends and intermediate holes staggered.

C. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units.

2.7 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.



B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span, but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated.

C. Galvanize and prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

D. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with

2.8 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.9 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.

2.10 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A153/A153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123/A123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean galvanized surfaces of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.

C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless indicated.

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:

1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings":

SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 4. Other Steel Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 5. Galvanized-Steel Items: SSPC-SP 16, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated Galvanized

Steel, Stainless Steels, and Non-Ferrous Metals."

E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.



B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness

shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns.

1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with shrinkage-resistant grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.4 REPAIRS

A. Touchup Painting:

1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. a. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

2. Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 52 13 - 1 of 7

SECTION 05 52 13 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel railings.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Product Data:

1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Fasteners. 3. Post-installed anchors. 4. Handrail brackets. 5. Shop primer. 6. Intermediate coats and topcoats. 7. Bituminous paint. 8. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. 9. Metal finishes. 10. Paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For delegated-design professional engineer.


C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

D. Product Test Reports: For tests on railings performed by a qualified testing agency, in accordance with ASTM E894 and ASTM E935.



E. Research Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of railings from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction.

2.2 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt and that provides 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface.

2.3 STEEL RAILINGS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.

1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.

C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. Fastener Materials:

1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railing Components: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railing Components: Type 304 stainless steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329/F2329M for zinc coating.

3. Finish exposed fasteners to match appearance, including color and texture, of railings.



B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction and capable of withstanding design loads.

C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated.

3. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193 or ICC-ES AC308.


A. Handrail Brackets: Cast stainless steel, center of handrail.

B. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select in accordance with AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

C. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint, complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

E. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting"."

F. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.


G. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.

H. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.

I. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting."

J. Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI #77 and compatible with primer and topcoat.

K. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat.

L. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion, complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M.

M. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout, complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

B. Shop assemble railings to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.



1. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately.

1. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

E. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water.

1. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 2. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous locations.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded [or] connections unless otherwise indicated.

H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish

Standards" for Finish #2 welds; good appearance, completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay

I. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings.

J. Form changes in direction as follows:

1. By radius bends of radius indicated or. 2. By bending to smallest radius that will not result in distortion of railing member.

K. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

L. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated cap and end fittings of same metal and finish as railings.

M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.

N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.

O. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work.

1. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. 2. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.



P. For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure.

Q. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.

2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanized Railings:

1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 2. Comply with ASTM A123/A123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 3. Comply with ASTM A153/A153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. 4. Do not quench or apply post-galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. 5. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep

holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.

C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner and as follows.

1. Comply with SSPC-SP 16.

D. For nongalvanized-steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves; however, hot-dip galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry.

E. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:

1. Exterior Railings: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3.

F. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1 for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.

1. Shop prime uncoated railings with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated. 2. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.

G. Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting."

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements are clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.


A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings.

1. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.



2. Install railings level, plumb, square, true to line; without distortion, warp, or rack. 3. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and

levels. 4. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished after fabrication

and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

5. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 6. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of

steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.

B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.

3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article, whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.

B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve, extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side; fasten internal sleeve securely to one side; and locate joint within 6 inches of post.

3.4 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with flanges, angle type, or floor type, as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:

1. For steel railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.

3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS

A. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with railing ends and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts.

B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and.

C. Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.

1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.

D. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between studs.

Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 4. For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or through

concealed steel reinforcements.



3.6 REPAIR

A. Touchup Painting:

1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. a. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period, so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS EXPANDED METAL GRATINGS 05 53 19- 1 of 5

SECTION 05 53 19 - EXPANDED METAL GRATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes expanded metal gratings and metal frames and supports for gratings.


1. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing" for structural-steel framing system components. 2. Section 05 52 13 "Pipe and Tube Railings" for metal pipe and tube handrails and railings.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, and supports. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Product Data: For paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For gratings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless steel certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.


C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design gratings.

B. Structural Performance: Gratings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Walkways and Elevated Platforms Other Than Exits: Uniform load of 60 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Walkways and Elevated Platforms Used as Exits: Uniform load of 100 lbf/sq. ft. 3. Limit deflection to L/360 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less.

2.2 EXPANDED METAL GRATINGS

A. Provide expanded metal gratings in material, finish, style, size, thickness, weight, and type indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for indicated applications and as needed to support indicated loads.

1. Material: Aluminum, Mill finish. 2. Style Designation: 2.00# Grating, 48% open 3. Type: II, expanded and flattened.

2.3 ALUMINUM

A. General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer for type of use indicated, with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy, and temper designated below for each aluminum form required.

B. Extruded Bars and Shapes: ASTM B 221, alloys as follows:

1. 6061-T6 or 6063-T6, for bearing bars of gratings and shapes. 2. 6061-T1, for grating crossbars.

C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 5052-H32.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy Group 1.

D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.



E. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.


A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.


B. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

B. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

D. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately.

E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space the anchoring devices to secure gratings, frames, and supports rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

1. Fabricate toeplates for attaching in the field. 2. Toeplate Height: 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

F. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations of sizes and at locations indicated. Cut openings neatly and accurately to size. Edge-band openings with bars having a thickness not less than overall grating thickness at contact points.

G. Where gratings are pierced by pipes, ducts, and structural members, cut openings neatly and accurately to size and weld a strap collar not less than 1/8 inch thick to the cut ends. Divide panels into sections only to the extent required for installation where grating platforms and runways are to be placed around previously installed pipe, ducts, and structural members.

2.7 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS

A. Frames and Supports for Metal Gratings: Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive gratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items.



1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from same basic metal as gratings. 2. Equip units indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry with integrally welded anchors.

Unless otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches o.c. and provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 8 inches long.

B. Galvanize steel frames and supports in the following locations:

1. Exterior.

2.8 STEEL FINISHES

A. Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly.

B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:

1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings":

SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete or masonry.

D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

E. Attach toeplates to gratings by welding at locations indicated.

F. Field Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately.



3.2 INSTALLING EXPANDED METAL GRATINGS

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing gratings.

B. Place units with straight edge of bond up and with long direction of diamond-shaped openings parallel to direction of span.

C. Attach removable units to supporting members by bolting at 6-inch intervals.

D. Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding unless otherwise indicated. Space welds at 6-inch intervals.

E. Attach aluminum units to steel supporting members by bolting at 6-inch intervals.

F. Butt edges parallel to long direction of diamond-shaped openings and weld at every second bond point. Place individual grating sections so diamonds of one piece are aligned with those of adjacent sections.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Clean and touchup field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 10 53 - 1 of 6

SECTION 06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 2. Wood furring and grounds. 3. Wood sleepers. 4. Plywood backing panels.


1. Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing" for sheathing, subflooring, and underlayment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension.

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal size in least dimension.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.


A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Post-installed anchors. 5. Metal framing anchors.



06 10 53 - 2 of 6


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back

of each piece. 3. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.

2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency.

D. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.



06 10 53 - 3 of 6

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-

treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D6841. For enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where high-temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, provide material with adjustment factors of not less than 0.85 modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme fiber in bending for Project's climatological zone.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency.

E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

F. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Concealed blocking. 2. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members in connection

with roofing. 3. Plywood backing panels.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Cants. 4. Furring. 5. Grounds.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any of the following species:

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; SPIB. 3. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 4. Northern species; NLGA. 5. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.

C. Concealed Boards: 19 percent maximum moisture content of any of the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA,

WCLIB, or WWPA.



06 10 53 - 4 of 6

4. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA. 5. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.

D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A153/A153M or Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667.

C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C954, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

D. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.


A. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.

B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

C. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.



06 10 53 - 5 of 6

D. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.

E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.

G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows:

1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.

2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal thickness.

3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below partitions.

4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet o.c.

H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

J. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

K. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate

Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings. 3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

L. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER

A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.



06 10 53 - 6 of 6

C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF WOOD FURRING

A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work.

B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- size furring horizontally and vertically at 24 inches o.c.

C. Furring to Receive: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- size furring vertically at 16 inches o.c.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SHEATHING 06 16 00 - 1 of 3

SECTION 06 16 00 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Subflooring/Underlayment


1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.



1. Review installation, special details, transitions and mockups.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials.

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D5516.

4. For products receiving waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

5. For air-barrier and water-resistant glass-mat gypsum sheathing, include manufacturer's technical data and tested physical and performance properties of products.

B. Shop Drawings: For air-barrier and water-resistant glass-mat gypsum sheathing assemblies.

1. Show locations and extent of sheathing, accessories, and assemblies specific to Project conditions. 2. Include details for sheathing joints and cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside

corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction. 3. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.



2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS

A. Emissions: Products shall meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

B. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated.

C. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.

2.2 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT

A. Underlayment: Provide underlayment in nominal thicknesses indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/4 inch over smooth subfloors and not less than 3/8 inch over board or uneven subfloors.

1. Plywood Underlayment for Carpet: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, Underlayment.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. For underlayment sheathing, provide fasteners.

B. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.


A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Wood Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code.



2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in the ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.

3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.

E. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.

F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.

3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.

B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:

1. Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: a. Glue and fasten with screws to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. c. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.

2. Subflooring: a. Glue and fasten with screws to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. c. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.

3. Underlayment: a. Glue and fasten with screws to subflooring. b. Space panels 1/32 inch apart at edges and ends. c. Fill and sand edge joints of underlayment receiving resilient flooring immediately before installing

flooring.


A. ABAA Quality Assurance Program: Perform examinations, preparation, installation, testing, and inspections under ABAA's Quality Assurance Program.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

06 40 23 - 1 of 6

SECTION 06 40 23 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Closet and utility shelving. 2. Interior frames and jambs. 3. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing interior architectural woodwork items

that are not concealed within other construction. 4. Shop priming of interior architectural woodwork. 5. Shop finishing of interior architectural woodwork.


1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing interior architectural woodwork that are concealed within other construction before interior architectural woodwork installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections, to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.




1. Anchors. 2. Adhesives. 3. Shop finishing materials. 4. Waterborne Treatments: For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that

moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include the following: a. Dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections. b. Attachment details.

2. Show large-scale details. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including blocking and reinforcement

concealed by construction and specified in other Sections. 4. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of shop-applied exposed finish.



06 40 23 - 2 of 6

1. Size: a. Panel Products: 12 inches by 12 inches. b. Lumber Products: Not less than 5 inches wide by 12 inches long, for each species and cut,

finished on one side and one edge.


A. Product Certificates: For the following:

1. Composite wood and agrifiber products. 2. Adhesives.

B. Evaluation Reports: For wood materials, from ICC-ES.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTLAS

A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: certificates.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.


A. Comply with the Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 2.

B. Do not deliver interior architectural woodwork until painting and similar finish operations that might damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas.

C. Store woodwork in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.

1. Handle and store fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior architectural woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels designed for building occupants for the remainder of the construction period.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior architectural woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Field Measurements: Where interior architectural woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

D. Established Dimensions: Where interior architectural woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.



06 40 23 - 3 of 6

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the Architectural Woodwork Standards for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork and installation complies with requirements of grades specified.

2. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the Architectural Woodwork Standards. Comply with Contract Documents and Architectural Woodwork Standards.

2.2 CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING

A. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Custom.

B. Shelf Material: 3/4-inch veneer-faced panel product with solid-lumber edge.

C. Cleats: 3/4-inch solid lumber.

D. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood.

E. Closet Rods: 1-1/2-inch- diameter, hardwood.

F. Rod Flanges: Clear, kiln-dried, hardwood turnings.

G. Wood Finish: Transparent.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

1. Preservative Treatment: Provide softwood lumber treated by pressure process, AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b. a. Provide where in contact with concrete or masonry. b. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. c. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic

or chromium. d. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American

Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review.

B. Provide self-drilling screws for metal-framing supports, as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer.

C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.

1. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. 2. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at

floors.

D. Installation Adhesive: Product recommended by fabricator for each substrate for secure anchorage.



06 40 23 - 4 of 6

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.

B. Fabricate interior architectural woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

1. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: a. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated. b. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch.

C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site.

1. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 2. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times interior architectural woodwork

fabrication will be complete. 4. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.

a. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting.

b. Verify that parts fit as intended, and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on approved Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.

2.5 SHOP PRIMING

A. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with the Architectural Woodwork Standards for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing interior architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.

B. Interior Architectural Woodwork for Opaque Finish: Shop prime with one coat of wood primer as specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."

1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces.

C. Interior Architectural Woodwork for Transparent Finish: Shop-seal concealed surfaces with required pretreatments and first coat of finish as specified in Section 09 93 00 "Staining and Transparent Finishing."

1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces.

2.6 SHOP FINISHING

A. Finish interior architectural woodwork with transparent finish at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 5 for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing interior architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.

1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of interior architectural woodwork. Apply two coats to end-grain surfaces.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Custom. 2. Finish: System - 5, Varnish, Conversion. 3. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-grain

wood before staining and finishing.



06 40 23 - 5 of 6

4. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 5. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods. 6. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter according to ASTM D 523.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition interior architectural woodwork to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours prior to beginning of installation.

B. Before installing interior architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming of concealed surfaces.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install interior architectural woodwork to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

B. Assemble interior architectural woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed during shop fabrication.

C. Install interior architectural woodwork level, plumb, true in line, and without distortion.

1. Shim as required with concealed shims. 2. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

D. Scribe and cut interior architectural woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Preservative-Treated Wood: Where cut or drilled in field, treat cut ends and drilled holes according to AWPA M4.

F. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork.

G. Anchor interior architectural woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates.

1. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. 2. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with interior architectural

woodwork. 3. For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed.

H. Standing and Running Trim:

1. Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible.

2. Do not use pieces less than 96 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. 3. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 4. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with latex sealant, painted to match wall. 5. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

3.3 REPAIR

A. Repair damaged and defective interior architectural woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects and to result in interior architectural woodwork being in compliance with requirements of Architectural Woodwork Standards for the specified grade.

B. Where not possible to repair, replace defective woodwork.



06 40 23 - 6 of 6

C. Shop Finish: Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of interior architectural woodwork.

1. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 2. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only

sealer/prime coats are shop applied.

D. Field Finish: See Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting" and Section 09 93 00 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for final finishing of installed interior architectural woodwork not indicated to be shop finished.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean interior architectural woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 1 of 3

SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Mineral-wool blanket insulation.


1. Section 07 53 23 "Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing" for insulation specified as part

of roofing construction. 2. Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board" for sound attenuation blanket used as acoustic insulation.



1. Mineral-wool blanket insulation.


A. Installer's Certification: Listing type, manufacturer, and R-value of insulation installed in each element of the building thermal envelope.

1. For blown-in or sprayed fiberglass and cellulosic-fiber loose-fill insulation, indicate initial installed thickness, settled thickness, settled R-value, installed density, coverage area, and number of bags installed.

2. Sign, date, and post the certification in a conspicuous location on Project site.

B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION

A. Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation, Unfaced: ASTM C665, Type IA (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Rockwool International.




c. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company. 2. Flame-Spread Index: Not more than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke-Developed Index: Not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Labeling: Provide identification of mark indicating R-value of each piece of insulation 12 inches and wider

in width.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E84.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Install insulation with manufacturer's R-value label exposed after insulation is installed.

D. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

E. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.

B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.

2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.



3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes.

B. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING

07 53 23 - 1 of 11

SECTION 07 53 23 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Roofing requirements for patching at areas of cut for mechanical scope on roof.

1. Fully adhered ethylene-propylene-diene-terpolymer (EPDM) roofing system. 2. Substrate board. 3. Roof insulation. 4. Cover board. 5. Walkways.

B. In 2012 the roof was replaced on the entire branch campus building, including Units A and B. The minimum insulation thickness was 3.5" or a R value of +/- 19.5. The roofing system was a 20 year Firestone EPDM.


1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing" for wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels. 3. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems" apply to work of this Section.


A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes, including flatness and fastening. 5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and

condition of other construction that affects roofing system. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.



1. For insulation and roof system component fasteners, include copy of FM Approvals' RoofNav listing.



07 53 23 - 2 of 11

B. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including the following:

1. Layout and thickness of insulation. 2. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 3. Flashing details at penetrations. 4. Tie-in with air barrier.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Certificates:

1. Performance Requirement Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer, certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. a. Submit evidence of complying with performance requirements.

2. Special Warranty Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer, certifying that all materials supplied under this Section are acceptable for special warranty.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.



A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed and listed in FM Approvals' RoofNav for roofing system identical to that used for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.



07 53 23 - 3 of 11

1. Special warranty includes roof membrane, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate board, roof pavers, and other components of roofing system.

2. Warranty Period: 20 years from Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system such as roof membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period:

1. Warranty Period: 20 years from Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Installed roofing system and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and flashings shall remain watertight.

1. Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D3746, ASTM D4272, or the Resistance to Foot Traffic Test in FM Approvals 4470.

B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roof membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Wind Uplift Resistance: Design roofing system to resist the following wind uplift pressures when tested according to FM Approvals 4474, UL 580, or UL 1897:

D. FM Approvals' RoofNav Listing: Roof membrane, base flashings, and component materials shall comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 or FM Approvals 4470 as part of a roofing system, and shall be listed in FM Approvals' RoofNav for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals Certification markings.

1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90. 2. Hail-Resistance Rating: FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-34 SH.

E. SPRI's Directory of Roof Assemblies Listing: Roof membrane, base flashings, and component materials shall comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 or FM Approvals 4470 as part of a roofing system, and shall be listed in SPRI's Directory of Roof Assemblies for roof assembly identical for that specified for this Project.

1. Wind Uplift Load Capacity: 90 psf.

F. ENERGY STAR Listing: Roofing system shall be listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof Products Qualified Product List" for low -slope roof products.

2.2 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-TERPOLYMER (EPDM) ROOFING

A. EPDM Sheet: ASTM D4637/D4637M, Type I, nonreinforced, EPDM sheet.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by: a. Firestone Building Products.

2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: Black. 4. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from roof membrane manufacturer. 5. Coordinate scope of work with manufacturer to maintain existing roof warranty.




07 53 23 - 4 of 11

2.3 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with other roofing components.

1. Adhesive and Sealants: Comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application.

C. Protection Sheet: Epichlorohydrin or neoprene nonreinforced flexible sheet, 55 to 60 mils thick, recommended by EPDM manufacturer for resistance to hydrocarbons, non-aromatic solvents, grease, and oil.

D. Prefabricated Pipe Flashings: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer.

E. Roof Vents: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer.

1. Size: Not less than 4-inch diameter.

F. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, water based.

G. Seaming Material: Single-component, butyl splicing adhesive and splice cleaner.

H. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, single-component sealant, colored to match membrane roofing.

I. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant.

J. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.

K. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening components to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

L. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, molded pipe boot flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced EPDM securement strips, T-joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories.

1. Provide white flashing accessories for white EPDM membrane roofing.

2.4 SUBSTRATE BOARDS

A. Substrate Board: ASTM C1177/C1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum board or ASTM C1278/C1278M, fiber-reinforced gypsum board.

1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Surface Finish: Factory primed.

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck.

2.5 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by EPDM roof membrane manufacturer, approved for use in FM Approvals' RoofNav-listed roof assemblies.

2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with other roofing system components.



07 53 23 - 5 of 11

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

C. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:

1. Bead-applied, low-rise, one-component or multicomponent urethane adhesive.

D. Cover Board: ASTM C1177/C1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, or ASTM C1278/C1278M, fiber-reinforced gypsum board.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. b. National Gypsum Company. c. USG Corporation.

2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Surface Finish: Factory primed.

2.7 WALKWAYS

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

1. Size: Approximately 36 by 30 inches. 2. Color: Contrasting with roof membrane.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.

2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.

3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Section 05 31 00 "Steel Decking."

4. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system manufacturer has passed.

5. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture, recommended by roofing system manufacturer when tested according to ASTM D4263.

6. Verify that concrete-curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing components to roof deck have been removed.

7. Verify that joints in precast concrete roof decks have been grouted flush with top of concrete. 8. Verify that minimum curing period recommended by roof system manufacturer for lightweight insulating

concrete roof decks has passed. 9. Verify any damaged sections of cementitious wood-fiber decks have been repaired or replaced. 10. Verify adjacent cementitious wood-fiber panels are vertically aligned to within 1/8 inch at top surface.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing system installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.




07 53 23 - 6 of 11

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

C. Perform fastener-pullout tests according to roof system manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Submit test result within 24 hours of performing tests. a. Include manufacturer's requirements for any revision to previously submitted fastener patterns

required to achieve specified wind uplift requirements.

D. Install sound-absorbing insulation strips according to acoustical roof deck manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF ROOFING, GENERAL

A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, FM Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements, and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29.

B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at end of workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

C. Install roof membrane and auxiliary materials to tie into existing roofing to maintain weathertightness of transition and to not void warranty for existing roofing system.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION

A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of workday.

B. Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.

C. Installation Over Wood Decking:

1. Mechanically fasten slip sheet to roof deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening slip sheet to wood decks. a. Fasten slip sheet according to requirements in SPRI's Directory of Roof Assemblies for

specified Wind Uplift Load Capacity. b. Fasten slip sheet to resist specified uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

2. Install base layer of insulation with joints staggered not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows. a. Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers, install

noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if applicable, and install composite board insulation for top layer.

b. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks.

c. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width. d. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with each side equal to

the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches. 1) Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted.

e. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. f. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. g. Loosely lay base layer of insulation units over substrate. h. Mechanically attach base layer of insulation and substrate board using mechanical fasteners

specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to wood decks. 1) Fasten insulation according to requirements in SPRI's Directory of Roof Assemblies for

specified Wind Uplift Load Capacity. 2) Fasten insulation to resist specified uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of

roof. 3. Install upper layers of insulation and tapered insulation with joints of each layer offset not less than 12

inches from previous layer of insulation. a. Staggered end joints within each layer not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows. b. Install with long joints continuous and with end joints staggered not less than 12 inches in

adjacent rows.



07 53 23 - 7 of 11

c. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks.

d. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width. e. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with each side equal to


f. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. g. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. h. Loosely lay each layer of insulation units over substrate. i. Adhere each layer of insulation to substrate using adhesive according SPRI's Directory of Roof

Assemblies listed roof assembly requirements for specified Wind Uplift Load Capacity and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29, as follows: 1) Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus

or minus 25 deg F of equiviscous temperature. 2) Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly

pressing and maintaining insulation in place. 3) Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive,

firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

D. Installation Over Concrete Decks:

1. Install base layer of insulation with joints staggered not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows. a. Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers, install

noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if applicable, and install composite board insulation for top layer.

b. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks.

c. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width. d. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with each side equal to


e. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. f. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. g. Loosely lay base layer of insulation units over substrate. h. Adhere base layer of insulation to concrete roof deck according to FM Approvals' RoofNav

listed roof assembly requirements for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29, as follows: 1) Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at rate of 3/4 gal./100 sq. ft., and

allow primer to dry. 2) Set insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus or minus 25

deg F of equiviscous temperature. 3) Set insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and

maintaining insulation in place. 4) Set insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing

and maintaining insulation in place. 2. Install upper layers of insulation and tapered insulation with joints of each layer offset not less than 12

inches from previous layer of insulation. a. Staggered end joints within each layer not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows. b. Install with long joints continuous and with end joints staggered not less than 12 inches in

adjacent rows. c. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting

sloping roof decks. d. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width. e. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with each side equal to

the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches. 1) Trim insulation so that water is unrestricted.

f. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. g. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. h. Loosely lay each layer of insulation units over substrate. i. Adhere each layer of insulation to substrate using adhesive according to FM Approvals'

RoofNav listed roof assembly requirements for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29, as follows:



07 53 23 - 8 of 11

1) Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus or minus 25 deg F of equiviscous temperature.

2) Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

3) Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF COVER BOARDS

A. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.

1. Trim cover board neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks.

2. At internal roof drains, conform to slope of drain sump. a. Trim cover board so that water flow is unrestricted.

3. Cut and fit cover board tight to nailers, projections, and penetrations. 4. Loosely lay cover board over substrate. 5. Adhere cover board to substrate using adhesive according to FM Approvals' RoofNav listed roof

assembly requirements for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29, as follows: a. Set cover board in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus or minus 25 deg F

of equiviscous temperature. b. Set cover board in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining

insulation in place. c. Set cover board in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and

maintaining insulation in place.

B. Install slip sheet over cover board and immediately beneath roofing.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF ADHERED ROOF MEMBRANE

A. Adhere roof membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Unroll membrane roof membrane and allow to relax before installing.

C. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.

D. Accurately align roof membrane, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

E. Fabric-Backed Roof Membrane Adhesive: Apply to substrate at rate required by manufacturer, and install fabric-backed roof membrane.

F. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roof membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeters.

G. Apply roof membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

H. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape.

1. Firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roof membrane to ensure a watertight seam installation. 2. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing terminations.

I. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roof membrane that do not comply with requirements.

J. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roof membrane in place with clamping ring.



07 53 23 - 9 of 11

K. Adhere protection sheet over roof membrane at locations indicated.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF BASE FLASHING

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.

D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF WALKWAYS

A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install flexible walkways at the following locations: a. Perimeter of each rooftop unit. b. Between each rooftop unit location, creating a continuous path connecting rooftop unit

locations. c. Between each roof hatch and each rooftop unit location or path connecting rooftop unit

locations. d. Top and bottom of each roof access ladder. e. Between each roof access ladder and each rooftop unit location or path connecting rooftop unit

locations. f. Locations indicated on Drawings. g. As required by roof membrane manufacturer's warranty requirements.

2. Provide 6-inch clearance between adjoining pads. 3. Adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system

manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, roof membrane application, sheet flashings, protection, and drainage components, and to furnish reports to Architect.

B. Perform the following tests:

1. Flood Testing: Flood test each roofing area for leaks, according to recommendations in ASTM D5957, after completing roofing and flashing. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water. a. Perform tests before overlying construction is placed. b. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches with a minimum depth of 1 inch and not exceeding a

depth of 4 inches. Maintain 2 inches of clearance from top of base flashing. c. Flood each area for 24 hours. d. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until roofing and

flashing installations are watertight. 1) Cost of retesting is Contractor's responsibility.

e. Testing agency shall prepare survey report indicating locations initial leaks, if any, and final survey report.

2. Infrared Thermography: Testing agency shall survey entire roof area using infrared color thermography according to ASTM C1153. a. Perform tests before overlying construction is placed.



07 53 23 - 10 of 11

b. After infrared scan, locate specific areas of leaks by electrical capacitance/impedance testing or nuclear hydrogen detection tests.

c. After testing, repair leaks, repeat tests, and make further repairs until roofing and flashing installations are watertight. 1) Cost of retesting is Contractor's responsibility.

d. Testing agency shall prepare survey report of initial scan indicating locations of entrapped moisture, if any.

3. Testing agency shall prepare survey report indicating locations of initial discontinuities, if any.

C. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion, in presence of Architect, and to prepare inspection report.

D. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements.

3.10 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing system, inspect roofing system for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

3.11 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY

A. WHEREAS _______________________________ of ___________________________, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project:

1. Owner: <Insert name of Owner>. 2. Address: <Insert address>. 3. Building Name/Type: <Insert information>. 4. Address: <Insert address>. 5. Area of Work: <Insert information>. 6. Acceptance Date: _________________. 7. Warranty Period: <Insert time>. 8. Expiration Date: __________________.

B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period,

C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period Roofing Installer will, at Roofing Installer's own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition.

D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:

1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: a. lightning; b. peak gust wind speed exceeding 120;



07 53 23 - 11 of 11

c. fire; d. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection,

deterioration, and decomposition; e. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports,

and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; f. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and g. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other

persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner. 2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such

damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated.

3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work.

4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty.

5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty.

6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration.

7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.

E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this ___________ day of ___________________, ________________.

1. Authorized Signature: _______________________________________. 2. Name: ______________________________________. 3. Title: _______________________________________.



MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS APPLIED FIREPROOFING 07 81 00 - 1 of 6

SECTION 07 81 00 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes sprayed fire-resistive materials (SFRM).

1. Provide and install SFRM on all unexposed structural systems and surfaces. 2. Provide and install SFRM on all exposed structural systems and surfaces in unoccupied and non-

public spaces.

1.3 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review products, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained conditions, densities, thicknesses, bond strengths, and other performance requirements.



B. Shop Drawings: Framing plans, schedules, or both, indicating the following:

1. Extent of fireproofing for each construction and fire-resistance rating. 2. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Minimum fireproofing thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance rating of each

structural component and assembly. 4. Treatment of fireproofing after application.



B. Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing.

C. Evaluation Reports: For fireproofing, from ICC-ES.

D. Preconstruction Test Reports: For fireproofing.




A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution and for preconstruction testing.

1. Build mockup of each type of fireproofing and different substrate. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents

contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed

Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Pre-construction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform pre-construction testing on fireproofing.

1. Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and construction.

B. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods.

1. Bond Strength: Test for cohesive and adhesive strength according to ASTM E 736. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2.

2. Density: Test for density according to ASTM E 605. Provide density indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2.

3. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, attests that primers or coatings are compatible with fireproofing.

4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, obtain applied-fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for

corrective measures including the use of specially formulated bonding agents or primers.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperature is 44 deg F (7 deg C) or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application.

B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing for each fire-resistance design from single source.

C. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.



1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted otherwise.

D. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction, and the following VOC limits when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.

E. Low-Emitting Materials: Fireproofing used within the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

F. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos.

2.2 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A. SFRM: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed, lightweight, dry formulation, complying with indicated fire-resistance design, and mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar before conveyance and application.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carboline Company, subsidiary of RPM International, Fireproofing Products Div.; Pyrolite Series.

b. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn.; Grace Construction Products; Monokote MK-6 Series. c. Isolatek International; Cafco 400. d. Southwest Fireproofing Products Co.; Type 5MD.

2. Bond Strength: Minimum 150-lbf/sq. ft. (7.18-kPa) cohesive and adhesive strength based on field testing according to ASTM E 736. as specified in the approved fire-resistance design, according to ASTM E 605.

3. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to requirements of fire-resistance design or ASTM E 605, whichever is thicker, but not less than 0.375 inch (9 mm).

4. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 5. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency.

Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 0 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 0 or less.

6. Compressive Strength: Minimum 100 lbf/sq. in. (689 kPa) according to ASTM E 761. 7. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion according to ASTM E 937. 8. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 759. 9. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 760. 10. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. (0.270 g/sq. m) in 24 hours according to

ASTM E 859. 11. Fungal Resistance: Treat products with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation to result

in no growth on specimens per ASTM G 21. 12. Finish: Spray-textured finish.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.



B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with one or both of the following requirements:

1. Primer and substrate are identical to those tested in required fire-resistance design by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Primer's bond strength in required fire-resistance design complies with specified bond strength for fireproofing and with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on a series of bond tests according to ASTM E 736.

C. Bonding Agent: Product approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and finish required, according to fire-resistance designs indicated and fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, corner beads, and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive fireproofing.

E. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer.

F. Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire-resistance design indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer. Include pins and attachment.

G. Sealer: Transparent-drying, water-dispersible, tinted protective coating recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer for each fire-resistance design.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Cafco Bond-Seal Type X" by Isolatek International.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and according to each fire-resistance design. Verify compliance with the following:

1. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.

2. Objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates.

3. Substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, or other suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing application.

B. Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed before beginning fireproofing work.

C. Verify that roof construction, installation of roof-top HVAC equipment, and other related work is complete before beginning fireproofing work.

D. Conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.

E. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.



F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during application.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing.

C. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing.

D. For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of fireproofing. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive products after application.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, sealers, topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work.

B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

C. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fireproofing.

1. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fireproofing are in place.

2. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireproofing until application of fireproofing is completed.

D. Metal Decks:

1. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal deck substrates until concrete topping, if any, has been completed.

2. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal roof deck until roofing has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fireproofing.

E. Install auxiliary materials as required, according to fire-resistance design and fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. For auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

F. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

G. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected.

H. Install body of fireproofing in a single course unless otherwise recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

I. Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from fireproofing over which they are applied.



J. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of fireproofing material and matching finish approved for required mockups.

K. Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations.

L. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications.

M. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes:

1. Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for each finish selected.


A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Test and inspect as required by the IBC, 1704.10.

B. Perform the tests and inspections of completed Work in successive stages. Do not proceed with application of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design.

C. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest. 2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate

insufficient thickness, and retest.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

B. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged areas and fireproofing removed due to work of other trades.

D. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction.

E. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 1 of 6

SECTION 07 84 13 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Penetration firestopping systems for the following applications: a. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. b. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. c. Penetrations in smoke barriers.


1. Section 07 84 43 "Joint Firestopping" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke barriers.

1.3 ALLOWANCES

A. Penetration firestopping Work is part of an allowance.

1.4 UNIT PRICES

A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices.





B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping system, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittal.



B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.




A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Approval according to FM Approval 4991, "Approval Standard for Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency.

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products." 3) FM Approval in its "Approval Guide."

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. c. Hilti, Inc. d. Tremco, Inc.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.




1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated

except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at and no more than 50-cfm cumulative total for any 100 sq. ft. at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E84.

F. Manufactured Piping Penetration Firestopping System: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated

except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. 3. Sleeve: Molded-PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing flange on one

end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 4. Stack Fitting: ASTM A48/A48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern wye branch with neoprene O-ring at base

and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug. 5. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.

G. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials. 2. Substrate primers. 3. Collars. 4. Steel sleeves.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture.

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.

E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents or inorganic fibers.

F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.



G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed.

I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants.

2.4 MIXING

A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of firestopping.



C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform

surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E2174.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.

B. Where Intertek Group-listed systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers in Intertek Group's "Directory of Listed Building Products" under "Firestop Systems."

C. Where FM Approval-approved systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers listed in FM Approval's "Approval Guide" under "Wall and Floor Penetration Fire Stops."

D. Penetration Firestopping Systems with No Penetrating Items:

1. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.



E. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ-1000. 2. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.

F. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing:

1. UL-Classified Systems: C-AJ- 2001. 2. Type of Fill Materials: As required to achieve rating.

G. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Electrical Cables:


H. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Insulated Pipes:


I. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants:


J. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants:


K. Penetration Firestopping Systems for Groupings of Penetrants:




MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1 of 7

SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Mildew-resistant joint sealants. 4. Latex joint sealants.


1. Section 07 91 00 "Preformed Joint Seals" for preformed compressible foam and precured joint seals. 2. Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in sound-rated construction. 3. Section 32 13 73 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in paved roads, parking lots,

walkways, and curbing.




A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.



D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

C. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.

1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:

1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present.

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. 1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend

cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint

substrates.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Twenty years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:



1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BASF Corporation. b. Bostik, Inc. c. Pecora Corporation. d. Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants. e. Tremco Incorporated.

2.4 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.

B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. b. Pecora Corporation. c. The Dow Chemical Company. d. Tremco Incorporated.

2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Pecora Corporation. b. Tremco Incorporated.







2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BASF Corporation. b. Construction Foam Products; a division of Nomaco, Inc.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) Type O (open-cell material) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. d. Exterior insulation and finish systems.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.




4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace

them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant

movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor

sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile at where required according to Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated on Drawings according

to Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.




A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: a. Perform 3 tests for each 100 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut

along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or

tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Tile control and expansion joints. c. Other joints as required.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, P, 50, T, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. b. Joints between different materials listed above. c. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors windows and louvers. d. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. e. Other joints as required.



2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. c. Other joints as required.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Tile control and expansion joints. c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry walls and. d. Other joints as required.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement.

1. Joint Locations: a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors windows and

elevator entrances. c. Other joints as required.

2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

F. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joint. c. Other joints as required.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS WOOD WINDOW REPAIRS 08 01 52.61 - 1 of 8

SECTION 08 01 52.61 - WOOD WINDOW REPAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes wood window repairs as follows:

1. Base Bid Scope - Clean and adjust all existing wood windows. 2. Unit Price No. 8A – Wood Window Patch Type Repair. 3. Unit Price No. 8B – Wood Window Member Replacement Repair. 4. Unit Price No. 8C –Glazing Replacement. 5. Unit Price No. 8D – Wood Window Unit Replacement. 6. Alternate Price No. 08A – Replacement Windows throughout area of work.


1. Section 02 41 19 "Selective Demolition" for specific requirements relating to selectively demolishing construction, including window and trim removal.

2. Section 08 51 13 " Aluminum Windows" for new replacement sash. Bid as an alternate.

1.3 UNIT PRICES

A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices specified in Section 01 22 00 "Unit Prices."

1. Unit prices apply to authorized additions to and deletions from Work as authorized by Change Orders.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Design Reference Sample: A sample that represents the Architect's prebid selection of work to be matched; it may be existing work or work specially produced for the Project.

B. Glazing: Includes glass, glazing points, glazing tapes, glazing sealants, and glazing compounds.

C. Replicate: To reproduce in exact detail, materials, and finish unless otherwise indicated.

D. Window: Includes window frame, sash, hardware, storm window, and exterior and interior shutters unless otherwise indicated by context.

E. Wood Window Component Terminology: Wood window components for repair work include the following classifications:

1. Frame Components: Head, jambs, and sill. 2. Sash Components: Stiles and rails, parting bead, stop, and muntins. 3. Exterior Trim: Exterior casing, brick mold, and cornice or drip cap. 4. Interior Trim: Casing, stool, and apron.





1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Perform window repairs in the following sequence, which includes work specified in this and other Sections:

1. Tag units requiring extensive repair. 2. Clean surfaces. 3. General Wood-Repair Sequence:

a. Remove paint to bare wood. b. Rack frames slightly to inject adhesive into mortise and tenon joints; square frames to proper fit

before adhesive sets. c. Repair wood by consolidation, member replacement, partial member replacement, and patching. d. Sand, prime, fill, sand again, and prime surfaces again for refinishing.

4. Repair, refinish, and replace hardware if required. Reinstall operating hardware. 5. Install glazing, where broken. 6. Apply finish coats. 7. Install remaining hardware and weather stripping.



1. Include recommendations for product application and use. 2. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, and sections showing locations and extent of repair and replacement work, with enlarged details of replacement parts indicating materials, profiles, joinery, reinforcing, method of splicing into or attaching to existing wood window, accessory items, and finishes.

2. Include field-verified dimensions and provisions for sealant joints and flashing as required for location.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed wood and finish.

1. Identify wood species, cut, and other features. 2. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated, finished as required for use in the Work:

1. Replacement Units: 12-inch- long, full-size frame and sash sections with applied finish. 2. Replacement Members: 12 inches long for each replacement member, including parts of frame, sash,

exterior trim, and interior trim. 3. Repaired Wood Window Members: Prepare Samples using existing wood window members removed

from site, repaired, and prepared for refinishing. 4. Refinished Wood Window Members: Prepare Samples using existing wood window members removed

from site, repaired, and refinished. 5. Hardware: Full-size units with each factory-applied or restored finish. 6. Weather Stripping: 12-inch- long sections. 7. Glass: 12" x 12" units of each type and appearance.


A. Qualification Data: For wood-window-repair specialist.


A. Wood-Window-Repair Specialist Qualifications: A qualified wood window specialist, experienced in repairing, refinishing, and replacing wood windows in whole and in part. Experience only in fabricating and installing new wood windows is insufficient experience for repairing wood windows.



1. Title X Requirement: Each firm conducting activities that disturb painted surfaces shall be a "Lead-Safe Certified Firm" according to 40 CFR 745, Subpart E, and use only workers that are trained in lead-safe work practices.

B. Mockups: Prepare mockups of window-repair processes to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution and for fabrication and installation. Prepare mockups so they are as inconspicuous as practicable.

1. Locate mockups in locations that enable viewing under same conditions as the completed Work. 2. Wood Window Repairs: Prepare one entire window unit to serve as mockup to demonstrate samples of

each type of repair of wood window members including frame, sash, glazing, and hardware. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained

in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work

if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Pack, deliver, and store products in suitable packs, heavy-duty cartons, or wooden crates; surround with sufficient packing material to ensure that products are not deformed, broken, or otherwise damaged.

B. Store products inside a well-ventilated area and where environmental conditions comply with manufacturer's requirements; protect from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidity.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with wood window repairs only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within the environmental limits set by each manufacturer's written instructions and specified requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD WINDOW REPAIRS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 6, "Interior & Exterior Millwork," in AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for construction, finishes, grades of wood windows, and other requirements unless otherwise indicated.

1. Exception: Industry practices cited in Section 6, Article 1.5, Industry Practices, of the Architectural Woodwork Standards do not apply to the work of this Section.

2.2 WOOD-REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain wood consolidant and wood-patching compound from single source from single manufacturer.

2.3 HARDWARE

A. Window Hardware: Provide complete sets of window hardware consisting of sash balances, hinges, pulls, latches, and accessories indicated for each window or required for proper operation. Sets shall include replacement hardware to complement repaired and refinished, existing hardware. Window hardware shall smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock wood windows and be sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions.

B. Replacement Hardware: Replace existing damaged or missing hardware with new hardware manufactured by one of the following:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Architectural Resource Center (The).




b. Bronze Craft Corporation (The). c. Smith Restoration Sash.

C. Material and Design:

1. Material: Solid bronze of alloy indicated unless otherwise indicated. 2. Design: Match type and appearance of existing hardware. 3. Spring Sash-Balance: Concealed type; size and capacity to hold sash stationary at any open position. 4. Replacement Window Hardware: Match existing window hardware of the following types:

a. Window latch.

D. Hardware Finishes: Comply with BHMA A156.18 for base material and finish requirements indicated by the following:

1. BHMA 612: Satin bronze, clear-coated; bronze base metal.

2.4 WEATHER STRIPPING

A. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action; completely concealed when window is closed.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. National Guard Products, Inc. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co. c. Reese Enterprises, Inc. d. Zero International, Inc.

2. Weather-Stripping Material: Match existing materials and profiles as much as possible unless otherwise indicated. a. Cellular Elastomeric Gaskets: Preformed; complying with ASTM C 509. b. Dense Elastomeric Gaskets: Preformed; complying with ASTM C 864.


A. Cleaning Materials:

1. Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium pyrophosphate (TSPP), 1/2 cup of laundry detergent that contains no ammonia, 5 quarts of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite bleach, and 15 quarts of warm water for each 5 gal. of solution required.

2. Mildewcide: Commercial, proprietary mildewcide or a solution prepared by mixing 1/3 cup of household detergent that contains no ammonia, 1 quart of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite bleach, and 3 quarts of warm water.

B. Adhesives: Wood adhesives for exterior exposure, with minimum 15- to 45-minute cure at 70 deg F, in gunnable and liquid formulations as recommended in writing by adhesive manufacturer for each type of repair.

C. Fasteners: Use fastener metals that are noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined.

1. Match existing fasteners in material and type of fastener unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use concealed fasteners for interconnecting wood components. 3. Use concealed fasteners for attaching items to other work unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable. 4. For fastening metals, use fasteners of same basic metal as fastened metal unless otherwise indicated. 5. For exposed fasteners, use Phillips-type machine screws of head profile flush with metal surface unless

otherwise indicated. 6. Finish exposed fasteners to match finish of metal fastened unless otherwise indicated.

D. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips, and window accessories of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hot-dip zinc-coated steel complying with requirements in ASTM B 633 for SC 3 (Severe) service condition.




2.6 WOOD WINDOW FINISHES

A. Factory-Primed Replacement Units: Manufacturer's standard factory-prime coat on exposed exterior and interior wood surfaces; compatible with indicated finish coating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent materials from damage by performing wood window repairs.

B. Clean wood windows of mildew, algae, moss, plant material, loose paint, grease, dirt, and other debris by scrubbing with bristle brush or sponge and detergent solution. Scrub mildewed areas with mildewcide. After cleaning, rinse thoroughly with fresh water. Allow to dry before repairing or painting.

C. Condition replacement wood members and replacement units to prevailing conditions at installation areas before installing.

3.2 WOOD WINDOW REPAIRS, GENERAL

A. Have wood window repairs performed only by qualified wood-window-repair specialist.

B. Appearance Standard: Completed work is to have a uniform appearance as viewed by Architect from the window interior at 5 feet away and from the window exterior at 20 feet away.

C. Execution of the Work: In repairing wood windows, disturb them as minimally as possible and as follows:

1. Stabilize and repair wood windows to reestablish structural integrity and weather resistance while maintaining the existing form of each item.

2. Repair items in place where possible. 3. Install temporary protective measures to protect wood window work that is indicated to be completed

later.

D. Mechanical Abrasion: Where mechanical abrasion is needed for the work, use gentle mechanical methods, such as scraping and natural-fiber bristle brushing, that will not abrade wood substrate, reducing clarity of detail.

E. Repair and Refinish Existing Hardware: Dismantle window hardware; strip paint, repair, and refinish it to match finish samples; and lubricate moving parts just enough to function smoothly.

F. Repair Wood Windows: Match existing materials and features.

1. Repair wood windows by consolidating, patching, splicing, or otherwise reinforcing wood with new wood matching existing wood or with salvaged, sound, original wood.

2. Sash Balance: Repair sash balances to function according to type as specified in "Hardware" Article" above. Provide missing sash balances.

G. Replace Wood Units: Where indicated, duplicate and replace units with units made from salvaged, sound, original wood or with new wood matching existing wood. Use surviving prototypes to create patterns for duplicate replacements.

H. Protection of Openings: Where sash or windows are indicated for removal, cover resultant openings with temporary enclosures so that openings are weathertight during repair period.

I. Identify removed windows, frames, sash, and members with numbering system corresponding to window locations to ensure reinstallation in same location. Key windows, sash, and members to Drawings showing location of each removed unit. Permanently label units in a location that will be concealed after reinstallation.



3.3 WOOD WINDOW PATCH-TYPE REPAIR (UNIT PRICE NO. 08A)

A. General: Patch wood members that exhibit depressions, holes, or similar voids and that have limited amounts of rotted or decayed wood.

1. Remove sash from windows before performing patch-type repairs at meeting or sliding surfaces unless otherwise indicated. Reglaze units if required before reinstallation.

2. Verify that surfaces are sufficiently clean and free of paint residue before patching. 3. Remove rotted or decayed wood down to sound wood.

3.4 WOOD WINDOW MEMBER-REPLACEMENT REPAIR (UNIT PRICE NO. 08B)

A. General: Replace parts of or entire wood window members at selected locations indicated in the Wood-Window-Repair Schedule where damage is too extensive to patch.

1. Remove sash from windows before performing member-replacement repairs unless otherwise indicated. 2. Verify that surfaces are sufficiently clean and free of paint residue before repair. 3. Remove broken, rotted, and decayed wood down to sound wood. 4. Custom fabricate new wood to replace missing wood; either replace entire wood member or splice new

wood part into existing member. 5. Secure new wood using finger joints, multiple dowels, or splines with adhesive and nailing to ensure

maximum structural integrity at each splice. Use only concealed fasteners. Fill nail holes and patch surface to match surrounding sound wood.

B. Repair depressions, holes, or similar voids with patch-type repairs.

C. Clean spilled materials from adjacent surfaces immediately.

D. Glazing: Reglaze units if required before reinstallation.

1. Mill new and rout existing glazed members to accommodate new glass thickness. 2. Provide replacement glazing stops coordinated with glazing system indicated. 3. Provide glazing stops to match contour of sash frames.

E. Reinstall units removed for repair into original openings.

F. Weather Stripping: Replace nonfunctioning and install missing weather stripping to ensure full-perimeter and meeting rail weather stripping for each operable sash.

3.5 GLAZING (UNIT PRICE NO. 08C)

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, glazing systems, and glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Remove cracked and damaged glass and glazing materials from selected openings and prepare surfaces for reglazing.

C. Remove existing glass and glazing where selected, and prepare surfaces for reglazing.

D. Remove glass and glazing from openings and prepare surfaces for reglazing.

E. Size glass as required by Project conditions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, with reasonable tolerances.

F. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of glazing system, as determined by preconstruction testing.

G. Install setting bead, side beads, and back bead against stop in glazing rabbets before setting glass, according to glazing-system manufacturer's instructions.



H. Install glass with proper orientation so that coatings, if any, face exterior or interior as required.

I. Install glazing system. Install silicone glazing products as specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."

J. Disposal of Removed Glass: Remove from Owner's property and legally dispose of it unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 WOOD WINDOW UNIT REPLACEMENT (UNIT PRICE NO. 08D)

A. General: Replace existing wood window frame sash units at selected locations with new custom-fabricated units to match existing at locations and where damage is too extensive to repair.

B. Mill glazed members to accommodate glass thickness. Glaze units before installation.

C. Install units, hardware, weather stripping and accessories.

D. Install units level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding movement; anchored securely in place to structural support; and in proper relation to wall flashing, trim, and other adjacent construction.

E. Set sill members in bed of sealant for weathertight construction unless otherwise indicated.

F. Install window units with new anchors into existing openings.

G. Weather Stripping: Install full-perimeter and meeting rail weather stripping for each operable sash.

H. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

I. Disposal of Removed Units: Remove from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.7 WOOD WINDOW UNIT REPLACEMENT (ALTERNATE PRICE NO. 08A)

A. General: Replace existing window units through-out areas of work with Aluminum Windows. Refer to Specification Section 08 51 13, ALUMINUM WINDOWS.

B. Disposal of Removed Units: Remove from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.8 WEATHER STRIPPING INSTALLATION

A. Install weather stripping for tight seal of joints as determined by preconstruction testing and demonstrated in mockup.


A. Manufacturers Field Service: Engage wood-repair-material manufacturers' factory-authorized service representatives for consultation and Project-site inspection and to provide on-site assistance when requested by Architect.

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust existing and replacement operating sash, screens, hardware, weather stripping, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.


A. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately.



B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after repairing wood windows. Avoid damage to coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing and patching materials, dirt, and other substances.

C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction.

END OF SECTION 08 01 52.61


MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 11 13 - 1 of 7

SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Interior standard steel doors and frames. 2. Exterior standard steel doors and frames.


1. Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate requirements for installation of door hardware, electrified door hardware, and access control and security systems.





1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems, and

security systems. 7. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 8. Details of accessories. 9. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.



08 11 13 - 2 of 7

C. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule.


A. Qualification Data: For door inspector.

1. Fire-Rated Door Inspector: Submit documentation of compliance with NFPA 80, Section 5.2.3.1. 2. Egress Door Inspector: Submit documentation of compliance with NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.4. 3. Submit copy of DHI Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certificate.

B. Product Test Reports: For each type of fire-rated hollow-metal door and frame assembly fire-rated borrowed-lite assembly and thermally rated door assemblies for tests performed by a qualified testing agency indicating compliance with performance requirements.


A. Record Documents: For fire-rated doors, list of door numbers and applicable room name and number to which door accesses.


A. Fire-Rated Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality control inspections of fire-rated door assemblies shall meet the qualifications set forth in NFPA 80, section 5.2.3.1 and the following:

1. Door and Hardware Institute Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certification.

B. Egress Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality control inspections of egress door assemblies shall meet the qualifications set forth in NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.4 and the following:

1. Door and Hardware Institute Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certification.


A. Deliver hollow-metal doors and frames palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal doors and frames vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY. 2. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY. 3. Republic Doors and Frames. 4. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand.




08 11 13 - 3 of 7


A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated on Drawings, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

2. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

3. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

B. Thermally Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door assemblies with U-factor of not more than 0.38 deg Btu/F x h x sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM C518.

2.3 INTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 3; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level A.

1. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Edge Bevel: Provide manufacturer's standard beveled or square edges. f. Fire-Rated Core: Manufacturer's standard laminated mineral board core for fire-rated and

temperature-rise-rated doors. 2. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. b. Sidelite and Transom Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door

frame. c. Construction: Full profile welded.

3. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.4 EXTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 3; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level A.

1. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum A40 coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Edge Bevel: Provide manufacturer's standard beveled or square edges. f. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face

sheets. Seal joints against water penetration. g. Bottom Edges: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as

face sheets. Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape.

h. Core: Polystyrene. 2. Frames:



08 11 13 - 4 of 7

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum A40 coating.

b. Construction: Full profile welded. 3. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated.

2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches of frame height above 7 feet.

3. Postinstalled Expansion Anchor: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts, with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer.

B. Material: ASTM A879/A879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M or ASTM A1011/A1011M; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M.

E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics.

G. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Door Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames.

1. Sidelite and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.



08 11 13 - 5 of 7

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

4. above finish floor with a

C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to ANSI/SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for hardware.

D. Glazed Lites: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Provide stops and moldings flush with face of door, and with square stops unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is

capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal doors and frames. 4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types

indicated. 5. Provide stops for installation with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not

more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.

2.8 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

B. Factory Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.3.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.9 LOUVERS

A. Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, which comply with SDI 111, with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch- thick steel frame.

1. Sightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted-V or inverted-Y blades. 2. Lightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with baffles to prevent light from passing from one

side to the other. 3. Fire-Rated Automatic Louvers: Louvers constructed with movable blades closed by actuating fusible

link, and listed and labeled for use in fire-rated door assemblies of type and fire-resistance rating indicated by same qualified testing and inspecting agency that established fire-resistance rating of door assembly.

B. Form corners of moldings with hairline joints. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.



08 11 13 - 6 of 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install hollow-metal doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with approved Shop Drawings and with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint

continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes.

b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. 2. Fire-Rated Openings: Install frames according to NFPA 80. 3. Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

4. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 5. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and

masonry with grout or mortar. 6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion

anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Inspection Agency: Engage a qualified inspector to perform inspections and to furnish reports to Architect.

B. Inspections:

1. Fire-Rated Door Inspections: Inspect each fire-rated door according to NFPA 80, Section 5.2. 2. Egress Door Inspections: Inspect each door equipped with panic hardware, each door equipped with

fire exit hardware, each door located in an exit enclosure, each electrically controlled egress door, and each door equipped with special locking arrangements according to NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.



08 11 13 - 7 of 7

C. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

D. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door assembly installations comply with specified requirements.

E. Prepare and submit separate inspection report for each fire-rated door assembly indicating compliance with each item listed in NFPA 101.

3.4 REPAIR

A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

B. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Factory-Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for factory finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 1 of 5

SECTION 08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Five-ply flush wood veneer-faced doors for transparent finish. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.




A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following:

1. Door core materials and construction. 2. Door edge construction 3. Door face type and characteristics. 4. Door louvers. 5. Door trim for openings. 6. Door frame construction. 7. Factory-machining criteria. 8. Factory- finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each type of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Door schedule indicating door location, type, size, fire protection rating, and swing. 2. Door elevations, dimension and locations of hardware, lite and louver cutouts, and glazing thicknesses. 3. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems, and

security systems. 4. Dimensions and locations of blocking for hardware attachment. 5. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 6. Clearances and undercuts. 7. Requirements for veneer matching. 8. Doors to be factory finished and application requirements. 9. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three Samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in finished Work.

2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used.

3. Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches long, for each material and finish specified.



4. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.


A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Special warranties.

B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.

C. Record Documents: For fire-rated doors, list of door numbers and applicable room name and number to which door accesses.


A. Manufacturer's Certification: Licensed participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons, and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels designed for building occupants for the remainder of construction period.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Delamination of veneer. b. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. c. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span.

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.


A. Fire-Rated Wood Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated on Drawings, based on testing at positive pressure in accordance with NFPA 252.

1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.



2.3 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.

2.4 SOLID-CORE FIVE-PLY FLUSH WOOD VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Doors:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Eggers Industries. b. VT Industries Inc.

2. Performance Grade: ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Extra Heavy Duty. 3. Performance Grade:

a. ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Extra Heavy Duty: Classrooms public toilets janitor's closets assembly spaces exits and where indicated on Drawings.

4. ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Grade: Premium. 5. Faces: Single-ply wood veneer not less than 1/50 inch thick.

a. Species: Red oak. b. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). c. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. d. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. e. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions. f. Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building. Corridor-door

faces do not need to match where they are separated by 20 feet or more. g. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each separate room or

area of building. h. Blueprint Match: Where indicated, provide doors with faces produced from same flitches as

adjacent wood paneling and arranged to provide blueprint match with wood paneling. Comply with requirements in Section 06 42 16 "Flush Wood Paneling."

6. Exposed Vertical Edges: Same species as faces - Architectural Woodwork Standards edge Type A. a. Fire-Rated Single Doors: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer

stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed vertical edges. b. Fire-Rated Pairs of Doors: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for

applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

c. Fire-Rated Pairs of Doors: Provide formed-steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals. d. Mineral-Core Doors: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-

holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 1) Screw-Holding Capability: 550 lbf in accordance with WDMA T.M. 10.

7. Core for Fire-Rated Doors: As required to achieve fire-protection rating indicated on Drawings. a. Blocking for Mineral-Core Doors: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding

capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated on Drawings as follows: 1) 5-inch top-rail blocking. 2) 5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates. 3) 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have armor plates. 4) 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.

8. Construction: Five plies, hot-pressed bonded (vertical and horizontal edging is bonded to core), with entire unit abrasive planed before veneering.

2.5 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS

A. Wood Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard solid-wood louvers unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. 2. Profile: Chevron.




B. Louvers for Fire-Rated Doors: Metal louvers with fusible link and closing device, listed and labeled for use in doors with fire-protection rating of 1-1/2 hours and less.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allegion plc. b. ASSA ABLOY. c. L & L Louvers, Inc.

2. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated.

1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

2. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

1. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. 2. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, ANSI/BHMA-156.115-W, and

hardware templates. 3. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames, to verify dimensions and alignment before factory

machining. 4. For doors scheduled to receive electrified locksets, provide factory-installed raceway and wiring to

accommodate specified hardware. 5. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated

doors.

C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable

requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." 3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

2.7 FACTORY FINISHING

A. Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing.

1. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

2. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. 3. Stains and fillers may be omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Factory finish doors.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A TR-8 UV Cured Acrylated Polyester/Urethane 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Effect: Semifilled finish, produced by applying an additional finish coat to partially fill the wood pores. 5. Sheen: Satin.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."

B. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

C. Install frames level, plumb, true, and straight.

1. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. 2. Anchor frames to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates.

a. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. b. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush

with woodwork. 1) For factory-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed.

3. Install fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with NFPA 80. 4. Install smoke- and draft-control doors in accordance with NFPA 105.

D. Job-Fitted Doors:

1. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below. a. Do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated

doors. 2. Machine doors for hardware. 3. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 4. Clearances:

a. Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. b. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless

otherwise indicated on Drawings. c. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold

unless otherwise indicated. d. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

5. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 6. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by

labeling agency.

E. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

F. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.



MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

08 41 13 - 1 of 9

SECTION 08 41 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Storefront framing for window walls. 2. Operable window units.





1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.

2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following:

a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage.

3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12-inch (300-mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:

1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage.



08 41 13 - 2 of 9

3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage.


A. Preconstruction Laboratory Mockup Testing Submittals:

1. Testing Program: Developed specifically for Project. 2. Test Reports: Prepared by a qualified preconstruction testing agency for each mockup test. 3. Record Drawings: As-built drawings of preconstruction laboratory mockups showing changes

made during preconstruction laboratory mockup testing.

B. Qualification Data: For Installer and laboratory mockup testing agency.

C. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-framed entrance and storefront.

D. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed storefront systems and operable window units to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Laboratory Mockup Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.

1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

1.8 MOCKUPS

A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.



08 41 13 - 3 of 9

1. Build mockup of typical wall area.

a. Provide section of entrance wall system large enough to show all typical framing conditions.


1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following:

a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units.

B. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads:



08 41 13 - 4 of 9

a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph (40 mps). b. Exposure Category: B.

C. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19.1 mm), whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), whichever is smaller. a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) clearance between framing

members and operable units.

D. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

E. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:

1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:

a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.30 L/s per sq. m) at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

G. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Test according to AAMA 501.1 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested at dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

2. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating assemblies or water appearing on assemblies' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation

H. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:

1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor of not more than 0.45 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (2.55 W/sq. m x K) as determined according to NFRC 100.

2. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 56 frame and 67 glass (low E) when tested according to AAMA 1503.

I. Noise Reduction: Test according to ASTM E 90, with ratings determined by ASTM E 1332, as follows.

1. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class: Minimum 30.

J. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes:



08 41 13 - 5 of 9

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2. Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors,

and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.

a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal-surface temperature of 180 deg F (82 deg C).

b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C). c. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F (24 deg C).

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide:

1. Exterior Framing System:

a. Tri-Fab 451T Front Framing System as manufactured by Kawneer. b. Tri-Fab 451UT Front Framing system as manufactured by Kawneer.

2. Outswing Vent Windows:

a. 8225 TL IsoLock Windows 1) Outswing awning. 2) Insect screen with standard wicket

or comparable product by one of the following:

b. EFCO Corporation. c. TRACO. d. Tubelite. e. YKK AP America Inc.

2.3 FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane:

a. Front, refer to drawings. b. Center, refer to drawings.

4. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated screw spline system.

B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

D. Materials:

1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).



08 41 13 - 6 of 9

c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.4 VENTING WINDOWS

A. Aluminum Windows: Manufacturer's standard units, complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, with self-flashing mounting fins, and as follows:

1. Window Type: Awning. 2. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended by

manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 0.064-inch (1.63-mm) thickness at any location for main frame and sash members.

a. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate window units with an integral, concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier; located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior side; in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.

3. Mullions: Between adjacent windows, fabricated of extruded aluminum matching finish of window units.

4. Fasteners, Anchors, and Clips: Nonmagnetic stainless steel, aluminum, or other noncorrosive material, compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components of window units. Fasteners shall not be exposed, except for attaching hardware.

a. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum less than 0.128 inch (3.26 mm) thick, reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed-in, spline grommet nuts.

5. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard; of aluminum, stainless steel, die-cast steel, malleable iron, or bronze; including the following:

a. Cam-action sweep sash lock and keeper at meeting rails. b. Steel or bronze operating arms.

6. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric; complying with AAMA 701/702.

7. Insect Screens: Provide removable insect screen on each operable exterior sash, with screen frame finished to match window unit, complying with SMA 1004 or SMA 1201, and as follows:

a. Aluminum Wire Fabric: 18-by-18 (1.1-by-1.1-mm) or 18-by-16 mesh of 0.013-inch- (0.3-mm-) diameter, coated aluminum wire.

b. Mesh Color: Charcoal Gray.

B. Glazing: Same as adjacent aluminum-framed entrances and storefront glazing.

C. Finish: Match adjacent aluminum-framed entrances and storefront finish.

2.5 GLAZING



08 41 13 - 7 of 9

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."

C. Glazing Sealants: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."

D. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L.

E. Weatherseal Sealants: ASTM C 920 for Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O; chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and structural-sealant-glazed storefront manufacturers for this use.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch (25.4 mm) that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.

1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.

C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain

required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for spandrel

glazing. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent

possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

E. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using screw-spline system.



08 41 13 - 8 of 9

F. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers’ written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities to match existing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers.

2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

E. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."



08 41 13 - 9 of 9

F. Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 07 92 00 “Joint Sealants” and according to sealant manufacturer’s written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the following maximum tolerances:

1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3.2 mm in 3 m). 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3.2 mm in 6 m). 3. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch (12.7 to 25.4 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch (25.4 mm) wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch (6 mm).

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m); 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) over total length.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 1 of 10

SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors.

2. Electrified door hardware.


1. Section 08 11 13 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames". 2. Section 08 14 16 "Flush Wood Doors"

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant.

C. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.

D. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation.



1. Conference participants shall include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant.

B. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Conference participants shall include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant. 2. Incorporate conference decisions into keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system

including, but not limited to, the following: a. Flow of traffic and degree of security required. b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. c. Requirements for key control system. d. Requirements for access control. e. Address for delivery of keys.






B. Shop Drawings: For electrified door hardware.

1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Include details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems.

C. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant. Coordinate door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.

2. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in door hardware schedule in the Contract Documents.

3. Content: Include the following information: a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame. b. Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door

and frame schedule. c. Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity,

function, and finish of each door hardware product. d. Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other

building control systems. e. Fastenings and other installation information. f. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and designations contained in door hardware schedule. g. Mounting locations for door hardware. h. List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame.

D. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of electrified door hardware.

1. Certify that door hardware for use on each type and size of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies.

C. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals.

B. Schedules: Final door hardware and keying schedule.




A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedule. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings,

based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) and an Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC) .


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.

C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.

D. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use.

2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer.

1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.


A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated doors are indicated, provide door hardware complying with NFPA 80 that is listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that complies with requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.



C. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

E. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with ICC A117.1 .

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.

2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf applied parallel to door at latch. c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high.

4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least 5 seconds to move to a position of 12 degrees from the latch.

5. Adjust spring hinges so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 1.5 seconds to move to the closed position.

2.3 HINGES

A. Hinges: Conform to ANSA A156.1. Five knuckle design, ball bearing. Provide NRP (non-removable pin) at all exterior reverse bevel doors. Unless otherwise scheduled, supply one (1) hinge for every 30” of door height, Provide 4 ½” x 4 ½” hinges, except at doors exceeding 36” in width where 5” x 4 ½” hinges shall be provided. Provide hinges with phillips flat-head screws unless specified otherwise.

B. Specified Manufacturers: Stanley or one of the following manufacturers:

1. Bommer 2. Hager 3. McKinney 4. Or equal as approved by the Professional

2.4 CONTINUOUS HINGES

A. All hinges to be non-handed and completely reversible. Coordinate hinge types with the door supplier. Factory cut hinges for door size.

B. Specified Manufacturers: Stanley or one of the following manufacturers; 1. McKinney 2. Pemko 3. Select 4. Or equal as approved by the Professional

2.5 FLUSH BOLTS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Specified Manufacturer: Burns or one of the following manufacturers: 1. Ives 2. Rockwood 3. Trimco 4. Or equal as approved by the Professional.

B. Furnish all manual and automatic flush bolts as specified in hardware sets. C. Specified Manufacturer: Burns or one of the following manufacturers:

1. Ives 2. Rockwood 3. Trimco 4. Or equal as approved by the Professional.

2.6 CYLINDERS AND KEYING



A. CYLINDERS

1. All locks shall be furnished with removable core cylinders and manufactured by Best Lock Corporation and shall be a factory recoded continuation or extension of an existing keying system previously furnished by these manufacturers for this College.

2. Provide cylinders and keys protected from unauthorized manufacture and distribution by manufacturer’s United States patents. The key design and tolerances shall permit the cutting of keys with standard code or duplicating machines. The requirement for a single-purpose or keyway-specific cutting or duplicating machine shall not be allowed. Stamp all change keys with keyset symbol (VKC), but do not stamp with key section or bitting number. a. Specified Manufacturer: Best Cormax b. Approved Equal: None

3. Cylinders shall be furnished complete with collars, construction cores, 7-pin interchangeable cores, and two keys per cylinder. Cylinders shall be of correct type and length, fitted with correct cam or bar for operation of lock, and furnished with back plates and screws where required.

4. Construction cores shall be supplied to the General Contractor during the period of construction. These construction cores shall be returned to the Manufacturer after the permanent master keyed cores are installed.

5. Cores are to be Grand Master Keyed, Master Keyed, Keyed alike in Groups, and/or Keyed individually, as approved by the College. A Keying Schedule showing each door location, Manufacturer’s lock number, Manufacturer’s cylinder type number, finish, length, cam or bar type, and keying detail, shall be prepared by the Cylinder Manufacturer’s Representative for the Hardware Supplier, and submitted to the College for approval. The Cylinder Manufacturer’s Representative shall provide technical assistance and information to the College in establishing the keying system. Master keyed cores shall be installed by the General Contractor.

2.7 KEYING

A. Factory grand masterkey and construction key all locks and cylinders. Furnish the following key amounts:

a. One (1) control key b. Three (3) change keys per lock c. Six (6) grand master keys d. Six (6) master keys per master level e. One hundred (100) Signature key blanks f. One hundred (100) XC key blanks g. Fifteen (15) construction/temporary keys

B. The above keys shall be included with the shipment of permanent cores.

C. Prior to ordering locks and cylinders, hold a keying meeting with the College’s designated agent to determine specific keying requirements. Obtain information on the existing key system (registry number, keyway, master designations) so new cylinders can be properly integrated. Review the lock functions with the College, at this time and advise the Professional of any College desired changes.

D. Seal master keys and all high-security or restricted keyway blanks in tamper-proof packaged boxes when shipped from the factory. Shrink wrap and imprint the boxes to ensure the integrity of the packaging.

2.8 LOCKING DEVICES

A. MORTISE LOCKSETS

1. Provide locksets confirming to ANSI 156.13 Series 1000 Grade 1.

2. Specified Manufacturer: Best 45H Series a. Sargent 8200 Series. b. Schlage L9000 Series. c. Or equal as approved by the Professional



3. All locks shall be furnished with removable core cylinders as manufactured by Best Lock Corporation, Falcon Lock Co., or Arrow Lock Corp., and shall be a factory recorded continuation or extension of an existing keying system previously furnished by these manufacturers for this College. a. The College shall furnish the keying records to the Director of the Key Record Department of

the Lock Company, so that cores can be combinated in the factory.

2.9 EXIT DEVICES

A. Provide exit devices which meet ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 requirements and are listed by Underwriters Laboratories bearing the UL label for life safety in full compliance with NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. Provide rail lengths to suit door width.

1. Specified Manufacturer: Precision 2100 Series or one of the following manufacturers: a. Von Duprin 98 Series b. Sargent 80 Series c. Or equal as approved by the Professional.

2.10 DOOR CLOSERS

A. All surface closers must be certified ANSI A156.4 Grade 1, and be adjustable to provide sizes 1 through 6 to comply with ADA requirements. Provide any necessary plates and brackets to suit conditions. Provide closers meeting the requirements of UBC 7-2 and UL10C.

1. Specified Manufacturer: Stanley 4550 Series or one of the following manufacturers: a. LCN 4041 b. Sargent 352 Series c. Or equal as approved by the Professional.

2.11 DOOR TRIM AND PROTECTIVE PLATES

A. Provide .050 gauge and two (2) inches less full width of door, or as specified. Provide push plates, pull plates, door pulls, and miscellaneous door trim as shown in the hardware schedule.

1. Specified Manufacturer: Burns or one of the following manufacturers: a. Rockwood b. Trimco c. Or equal as approved by the Professional.

2.12 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. WALL MOUNTED DOOR STOPS

1. Where a door is indicated on the plants to strike flush against a wall, provide wall bumpers.

2. Specified Manufacturers: Burns or one of the following manufacturers: a. Ives b. Rockwood c. Trimco d. Or equal as approved by the Professional.

B. OVERHEAD STOPS/HOLDERS

1. Where specified, overhead stops as shown in the hardware sets are to be provided.

2. Specified Manufacturers: ABH or one of the following manufacturers: a. Sargent 690/590 Series. b. Glynn Johnson 90/100 Series c. Or equal as approved by the Professional.



2.13 GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS

A. Provide continuous weatherseal on exterior doors and smoke, light, or sound seals on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide intumescent seals as requires to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

B. Provide threshold units no less than 4” wide, formed to accommodate change in floor elevation where indicated fabricated to accommodate door hardware and to fit door frames.

1. Specified Manufacturers: K.N. Crowder or one of the following manufacturers: a. Pemko b. Reese c. Zero d. Or equal as approved by the Professional.

2.14 FABRICATION

A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rating labels and as otherwise approved by Architect.

1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.

B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18.

C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware unless otherwise indicated.

1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.

2. Fire-Rated Applications: a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following:

1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames; use threaded-to-the-head wood screws for wood doors and frames.

2) Strike plates to frames. 3) Closers to doors and frames.

3. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.

2.15 FINISHES

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface-applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with door and hardware manufacturers' written instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Wood Doors: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period.

1. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.

E. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings. Verify location with Architect.

1. Configuration: Provide least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with electrified door hardware.

F. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

G. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.



H. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

1. Do not notch perimeter gasketing to install other surface-applied hardware.

I. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.

J. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.


A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.

1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 70 degrees and so that closing time complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt.

B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months, six months and 12 months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.


A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include nine 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door and door hardware operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage Installer to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware.



3.9 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE (to be issued by addendum).



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1 of 9

SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Glass products. 2. Insulating glass. 3. Glazing sealants. 4. Glazing tapes. 5. Miscellaneous glazing materials.


1. Section 08 88 13 "Fire-Rated Glazing."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters in accordance with ASTM C1036.

C. IBC: International Building Code.

D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.



1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.



B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass the following products; 12 inches square.

1. Tinted glass. 2. Coated glass. 3. Insulating glass.



4. Spandrel glass.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer manufacturers of fabricated glass units glass testing agency and sealant testing agency.

B. Product Certificates: For glass.

C. Product Test Reports: For fabricated glass and glazing sealants, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period.

D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Fabricated-Glass Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of fabricated glass units who is approved and certified by primary glass manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified glazing contractor for this Project who is certified under the North American Contractor Certification Program (NACC) for Architectural Glass & Metal (AG&M) contractors and who employs glazing technicians certified under the Architectural Glass and Metal Technician (AGMT) certification program.

C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated.


A. Protect glazing materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated



glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.


B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain tinted and coated glass from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: For each product and installation method, obtain from single source from single manufacturer.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined in accordance with the IBC and ASTM E1300:

1. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed: 120 mph. b. Importance Factor: 1.0.

2. Design Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at

design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch, whichever is less. 4. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within

individual glass lites.

C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for

each lite. 3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 7

computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 4. SHGC and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 200 and based

on LBL's WINDOW 7 computer program. 5. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 300.



2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the IGCC.

D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than thickness indicated.

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project.

E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.

2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Guardian Glass; SunGuard. b. Pilkington North America. c. Saint-Gobain Glass Exprover NA. d. Vitro Architectural Glass.

B. Tinted Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 2 (tinted), Quality-Q3.


C. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

D. Reflective- and Low-E-Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C1376.


E. Silicone-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C1048, Type I, Condition C, Quality-Q3.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:







a. ICD High Performance Coatings.

F. Reflective- and Low-E-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C1376, Kind CS.

2.5 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified in accordance with ASTM E2190.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants. 2. Perimeter Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction Galvanized steel.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Technoform. 2) Thermix; a brand of Ensinger USA.

3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both.

2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of industry colors.

B. Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant, Class 100/50: Complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. b. The Dow Chemical Company. c. Tremco Incorporated.

2.7 GLAZING TAPES

A. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of

liquid sealant.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, recommended in writing by manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks:

1. Elastomeric with Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. 2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer.

D. Spacers:





1. Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer.

E. Edge Blocks:

1. Elastomeric with Shore A durometer hardness per manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer.

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

2.9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.



C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch- minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and in accordance with requirements in referenced glazing publications.

H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.



3.5 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

3.7 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Clear Glass Type: Fully tempered float glass.

1. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm. 2. Tempered safety glazing required.

B. Glass Type: Silicone-coated spandrel glass, fully tempered float glass.

1. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm. 2. Coating Location: Second surface. 3. Fallout Resistance: Passes fallout-resistance test in ASTM C 1048 for an assembly of glass and

adhered reinforcing material. 4. Tempered safety glazing required.

1.2 INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type: Clear, Low-E insulating glass.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Solarban 70XL (2) Starphire fully tempered float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Clear fully tempered float glass. 6. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.28 maximum. 7. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.26 maximum. 8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.27 maximum. 9. Provide safety glazing labeling.

B. Glass Type: Silicone-coated, insulating spandrel glass.



1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: fully tempered float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Clear fully tempered float glass. 6. Coating Location: Second surface.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS FIRE-RATED GLAZING 08 88 13 - 1 of 4

SECTION 08 88 13 - FIRE-RATED GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fire-protection-rated glazing.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.



B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product; 12 inches square.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of glass and glazing product.

B. Sample warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the NGA's Certified Glass Installer Program.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Tempered Glazing Units with Clear Intumescent Interlayer: Manufacturer agrees to replace units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of tempered glazing units with clear intumenscent interlayer is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is air bubbles within units, or obstruction of vision by contamination or deterioration of intumescent interlayer.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organization below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. NGA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, glass thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated, Quality-Q3.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

B. Laminated Glass: ASTM C1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.

1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer unless fire-protection or fire-resistance rating is based on another product.

2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING

A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on positive-pressure testing in accordance with NFPA 257 or UL 9, including hose-stream test, and shall comply with NFPA 80.

1. Fire-protection-rated glazing required to have a fire-protection rating of 20 minutes shall be exempt from hose-stream test.

B. Fire-Protection-Rated Tempered Glass: 6-mm thickness; fire-protection-rated tempered glass; complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. SAFTI FIRST Fire Rated Glazing Solutions. b. Technical Glass Products. c. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain.

C. Fire-Protection-Rated Tempered Glazing Units with Clear Intumescent Interlayer: Double glazing units made from two or more lites of uncoated, fully tempered, ultraclear float glass; with a perimeter edge seal enclosing a cavity filled with optically clear, semi-solid, intumescent polymer; complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. SAFTI FIRST Fire Rated Glazing Solutions.

2.4 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. Provide glazing gaskets, glazing sealants, glazing tapes, setting blocks, spacers, edge blocks, and other glazing accessories that are compatible with glazing products and each other and are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which products are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.





B. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. b. The Dow Chemical Company. c. Tremco Incorporated.

2. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of industry colors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Use methods approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products.

B. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.


A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

3.3 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type: 20-minute fire-protection-rated glazing with hose-stream test; fire-protection-rated laminated ceramic glazing.

B. Glass Type: 45-minute fire-protection-rated glazing;

1. Fire-protection-rated tempered glazing units with clear intumescent interlayer.




C. Glass Type : 90-minute fire-protection-rated glazing with 450 deg F temperature-rise limitation in rated doors only, with a maximum vision area of 100 sq. in.;

1. Fire-protection-rated tempered glazing units with clear intumescent interlayer.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES

09 21 16.23 - 1 of 3

SECTION 09 21 16.23 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.


A. Product Data: For each component of gypsum board shaft wall assembly.


A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and support them on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with gypsum-shaftliner-board manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Do not install finish panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E119 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES

A. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Gypsum Shaftliner Board:

1. Type X: ASTM C1396/C1396M; manufacturer's proprietary fire-resistive liner panels with paper faces, 1 inch thick, with double beveled long edges. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:




09 21 16.23 - 2 of 3

1) Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 2) National Gypsum Company. 3) USG Corporation.

C. Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing, General: Complying with ASTM C645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated and complying with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

1. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A653/A653M, G40 unless otherwise indicated.

D. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive, corner, and end members as follows:

1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches.

E. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with manufacturer's standard long-leg length, but at least 2 inches long and matching studs in depth.

F. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ClarkDietrich. b. Fire Trak Corp.

G. Finish Panels: As indicated. Gypsum board as specified in Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board." .


A. Provide auxiliary materials that comply with shaft wall manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes as specified in Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaft wall assembly manufacturer's written instructions for application indicated.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C1002 unless otherwise indicated.

D. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded.

1. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E488/E488M conducted by a qualified testing agency.

2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.




09 21 16.23 - 3 of 3


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install gypsum board shaft wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated and manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, wall-mounted door stops, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft wall assembly framing.

1. Reinforcing: Provide where items attach directly to shaft wall assembly as indicated on Drawings; accurately position and secure behind at least one layer of face panel.

C. Penetrations: At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons and floor indicators, and similar items.

D. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction.

E. Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.




MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 1 of 5

SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. 2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits. 3. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings.



A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks.

B. Evaluation Reports: For firestop tracks post-installed anchors and power-actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members are certified according to the product-certification program of the Certified Steel Stud Association the Steel Framing Industry Association or the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for steel unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 , hot-dip

galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645.

1. Steel Studs and Tracks: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: 1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co. 2) ClarkDietrich. 3) MarinoWARE.




4) Phillips Manufacturing Co. b. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: As required by performance requirements for horizontal

deflection 0.0329 inch. c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:

1. Single Long-Leg Track System: ASTM C 645 top track with 2-inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top track and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Double-Track System: ASTM C 645 top outer tracks, inside track with 2-inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer track sized to friction-fit over inner track.

3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: 1) ClarkDietrich. 2) MarinoWARE. 3) The Steel Network, Inc.

D. Firestop Tracks: Top track manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ClarkDietrich. b. Fire Trak Corp. c. Metal-Lite.

E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ClarkDietrich. b. MarinoWARE.

2. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0269 inch .

F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ClarkDietrich. b. MarinoWARE.

2. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings 0.0329 inch . 3. Depth: 1-1/2 inches, unless noted otherwise.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01 AC193 AC58 or AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. a. Uses: Securing hangers to structure. b. Type: Torque-controlled, expansion anchor [or] . c. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with

ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 , Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. d. Material for Exterior or Interior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1

stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 , and nuts, ASTM F 594 .







2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.

D. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-steel thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches unless noted otherwise.

E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.

2. Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0329 inch . b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings .

3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0329 inch .

4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

F. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong Ceiling & Wall Solutions. b. USG Corporation.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following:

1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.




1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation.

2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation.

3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation.

4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened.

C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

E. Direct Furring:

1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-

driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.



F. Z-Shaped Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.

G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.5 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by

bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that

interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within

performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws,

or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend

through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1 of 6

SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels.


1. Section 09 21 16.23 "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for metal shaft-wall framing, gypsum shaft liners, and other components of shaft-wall assemblies.

2. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.

3. Section 09 30 13 "Ceramic Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile.



1. Gypsum board, Type X. 2. Gypsum ceiling board. 3. Impact-resistant gypsum board. 4. Mold-resistant gypsum board. 5. Cementitious backer units. 6. Interior trim. 7. Joint treatment materials. 8. Sound-attenuation blankets.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E119 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C1396/C1396M.


2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered.

B. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M.


2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Impact-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M gypsum board, tested according to ASTM C1629/C1629M.


2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 3. Surface Abrasion: ASTM C1629/C1629M, meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements. 4. Indentation: ASTM C1629/C1629M, meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements. 5. Soft-Body Impact: ASTM C1629/C1629M, meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements. 6. Hard-Body Impact: ASTM C1629/C1629M, meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements according to test in

Annex A1. 7. Long Edges: Tapered. 8. Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274.

D. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.


2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274.







2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C1288 or ASTM C1325, with manufacturer's standard edges.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. National Gypsum Company. c. USG Corporation.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. Expansion (control) joint. f. Base-of-Wall Galvanized Moisture Barrier Trim: Galvanized-steel sheet, 2 inches high.

1) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a) VersaDry, LLC.

g. Base-of-Wall PVC Moisture Barrier Trim: Extruded PVC, 1-3/4 inch high. 1) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a) ClarkDietrich. b) Waterguard.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C475/C475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.







A. Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 INSTALLATION AND FINISHING OF PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks,

cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.



G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.

J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Type X: Vertical surfaces not otherwise indicated. 2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 3. Impact-Resistant Type: At all exposed vertical surfaces unless indicated otherwise. 4. Mold-Resistant Type: At all wet locations.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or

required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints.

Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile.



B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners. 3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 4. L-Bead: Use where indicated.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."

E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.




MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13 - 1 of 9

SECTION 09 30 13 - CERAMIC TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Porcelain tile. 2. Stone thresholds. 3. Tile backing panels. 4. Waterproof membrane. 5. Crack isolation membrane.


1. Section 03 30 53 "Misc. Cast-in-Place Concrete" for monolithic slab finishes specified for tile substrates.

2. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces.

3. Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units, glass-mat, water-resistant backer board.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."

C. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.

D. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.



B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For tile, grout, and accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile

and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 36 inches square 16 inches square, but not fewer than four tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work.



3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 4. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths. 5. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.



B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of product.

D. Product Test Reports: For tile-setting and -grouting products and certified porcelain tile.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 1 unopened carton for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work



A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.

D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type from single source or producer.



1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer.

1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer.

2. Obtain waterproof membrane and crack isolation membrane, except for sheet products, from manufacturer of setting and grouting materials.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer:

1. Stone thresholds. 2. Waterproof membrane. 3. Crack isolation membrane. 4. Cementitious backer units. 5. Metal edge strips.

2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS

A. All toilet room walls are to receive ceramic tile und. Accent tile is as called out on the finish schedule and/or the finish plans and interior elevations.

B. Ceramic Tile Type CWT-1, CWT02: Unglazed porcelain tile.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Daltile; Veranda Solids or comparable product by one of the following: a. American Olean; a division of Dal-Tile Corporation. b. Crossville, Inc. c. Florida Tile, Inc. d. Florim USA.

2. Face Size: 6-1/2 by 6-1/2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3/8 inch. 4. Face: Plain with square or cushion edges. 5. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Colors and

patterns as indicated on finish drawings.


http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457138023



6. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 7. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. Provide shapes

as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Wainscot Cap: Surface bullnose, module size 4 by 20 inches.

C. Ceramic Tile Type CWT-3: Unglazed porcelain tile.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Daltile; Veranda Solids or comparable product by one of the following: a. American Olean; a division of Dal-Tile Corporation. b. Crossville, Inc. c. Florida Tile, Inc. d. Florim USA.

2. Face Size: 3 by 3 inches mesh mounted on 13 by 13 sheet. 3. Thickness: 3/8 inch. 4. Face: Plain with square or cushion edges. 5. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Colors and

patterns as indicated on finish drawings. 6. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, 7. Trim Units: No trim units.

D. Accessories: Provide vitreous china accessories of type and size indicated, suitable for installing by same method as used for adjoining wall tile.

1. Two soap holders for each shower and tub indicated. 2. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.4 THRESHOLDS

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes.

1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.

B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C503/C503M, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 12 according to ASTM C1353 or ASTM C241/C241M and with honed finish.

1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining.

2.5 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

B. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Boiardi Products Corporation; a QEP company. b. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company. c. Custom Building Products. d. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC. e. MAPEI Corporation. f. Or equal as approved by the professional.


http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457138023




2.6 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for standard performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

B. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and fabric reinforcement.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Boiardi Products Corporation; a QEP company. b. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company. c. Custom Building Products. d. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC. e. MAPEI Corporation. f. Or equal as approved by the professional.

2.7 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Modified Dry-Set cement mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. C-Cure. b. Custom Building Products. c. Laticrete International, Inc. d. MAPEI Corporation. e. Mer-Kote Products, Inc.

Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene- butadiene- rubber liquid latex additive at Project site.

2.8 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Standard Cement Grout and Standard Non-Sanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. C-Cure. b. Custom Building Products. c. Laticrete International, Inc. d. MAPEI Corporation. e. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.

B. Grout for Pregrouted Tile Sheets: Same product used in factory to pregrout tile sheets.

C. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout in showers: ANSI A118.3.

D. Grout for Pregrouted Tile Sheets: Same product used in factory to pregrout tile sheets.

2.9 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

1. Use primers, backer rods, and sealant accessories recommended by sealant manufacturer.

B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints unless otherwise indicated.




C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. b. GE Silicones; a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700. c. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600 White.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

2.11 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.10 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding.

3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.

4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.


3.11 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.



B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproof membrane by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

3.12 INSTALLATION OF CERAMIC TILE

A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush.

F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints.

3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.

G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:

1. Porcelain Tile: 1/8 inch.

H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them.

J. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated.



3.13 INSTALLATION OF TILE BACKING PANEL

A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use modified dry-set mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.14 INSTALLATION OF WATERPROOF MEMBRANE

A. Install waterproof membrane to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate.

B. Allow waterproof membrane to cure and verify by testing that it is watertight before installing tile or setting materials over it.

3.15 INSTALLATION OF CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE

A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate.

B. Allow crack isolation membrane to cure before installing tile or setting materials over it.


A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions

but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

3.17 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.

3.18 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior Wall Installations, Masonry or Concrete:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W202; thinset mortar. a. Ceramic Tile Type: CWT-1, CWT-2, CWT-3. b. Thinset Mortar: Standard dry-set Modified dry-set Medium-bed, modified dry-set Improved

modified dry-setmortar. Latex Portland cement. c. Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout. Epoxy grout in showers.

B. Interior Wall Installations, Metal studs or Furring: a. Ceramic Tile Type: CWT-1, CWT-2, CWT-3 b. Thinset Mortar: Latex-Portland Cement mortar.



c. Cementitious Back d. Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout.

C. Cementitious backer unit ‘CBU’ or fiber cement underlayment.

D. Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout.

E. Wall Installations at shower receptor walls:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation : TCNA B412-13; thinset mortarwater-cleanable, tile-setting epoxy on waterproof membrane over cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board. a. Ceramic Tile Type: CWT-3. b. Thinset Mortar: Standard dry-set mortar. c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 1 of 8

SECTION 09 51 13 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings.


1. Section 09 51 23 "Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for ceilings consisting of mineral-base acoustical tiles used with fully concealed suspension systems, stapling, or adhesive bonding.

C. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete.





B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of sizes indicated below:

1. Acoustical Panels: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch-long Samples of each type,

finish, and color. 3. Clips: Full-size hold-down clips.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels.



5. Perimeter moldings.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Acoustical Panel: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace pan-els that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Acoustical Panels: Sagging and warping 2. Grid System: Rusting and manufacturer's defects

B. Warranty Period:

1. Acoustical panels: Ten (10) years from date of substantial completion. 2. Grid: Ten (10) years from date of substantial completion. 3. Acoustical panels and grid systems with HumiGuard Plus or HumiGuard Max performance supplied by

one source manufacturer is Thirty (30) years from date of substantial completion.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Panel Ceilings: Full-size units equal to 10% of amount installed for each type indicated,


A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents

contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work



A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and its supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS


1. Armstrong Ceiling & Wall Solutions. 2. CertainTeed Corporation. 3. USG Corporation.

B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E 1264 and designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING SCHEDULE:

A. Acoustical Panel: Type I – Utility Rooms, Storage and Ancillary Areas.

1. Manufacturer: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Type: Cortega (non-directional) Item #770 (provide Fire Guard #824 where required for fire rated

ceiling system).

a. Type III, Form 2, Pattern CD.

i. CT: Baroque (Protectone). ii. USG: Rock Face (Fire Code). iii. Or equal as approved by the Professional.

3. Performance Characteristics:

a. Sound Control: Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC of 0.55 in compliance with ASTM 423. b. Sound Transmission Class: CAC/CSTC minimum of 35 in compliance with ASTM E 1414 or ASTM E 413.

4. Surface Burning:

a. Class A, per ASTM E 1264.

5. Light Reflectance: Actual light reflectance shall be 0.82 according to ASTM E 1477. 6. Product Characteristics:




a. Size: 24-inch by 24-inch by 5/8-inch. b. Edge Detail: Square Lay-in. c. Substrate: Wet-formed Mineral Fiber. d. Surface: Factory Applied vinyl latex paint. e. Suspension System: Prelude XL 15/16-inch Exposed Tee grid systems.

B. Acoustical Panel: Type II – Lounges, Corridors and Lobbies:

1. Manufacturer: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Type: Fine Fissured Tegular – High Acoustics, #1717 (provide #1824 Fire Guard where required for

fire rated ceiling system).

a. Type III, Form 2, Pattern CE.

i. CT: Cashmere High NRC (Protectone). ii. USG: Eclipse (Fire Code). iii. Or equal as approved by the Professional.


a. Sound Control: Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC of 0.70 in compliance with ASTM C 423. b. Sound Transmission Class: CAC/CSTC minimum of 40 in compliance with ASTM E 1414 or ASTM E 413.

4. Surface Burning:



a. Size: 24-inch by 24-inch by 3/4-inch. b. Edge Detail: Angled Tegular. c. Substrate: Wet-formed Mineral Fiber. d. Surface: Factory Applied vinyl latex paint. e. Suspension System: Prelude XL 15/16-inch Exposed Tee grid systems.

C. Acoustical Panel: Type III – Dorm Rooms and other spaces unless specifically noted otherwise:

1. Manufacturer: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Type: Georgian #1753 (prove Dune #1852 Fire Guard where required for fire rated ceiling System).

a. Type III, Form 2, Pattern CE

i. CT: Cashmere High NRC (Protectone). ii. USG: Fissured (Fire Code). iii. Or equal as approved by the Professional.


a. Sound Control: Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC of 0.55 in compliance with ASTM C423. b. Sound Transmission Class: CAC/CSTC minimum of 35 in compliance with ASTM E 1414 or ASTM E 413.

4. Surface Burning:

a. Class A, per ASTM E 1264




a. Size: 24-inch by 24-inch by 5/8-inch b. Edge Detail: Beveled Tegular c. Substrate: Wet-formed Mineral Fiber d. Surface: Factory Applied vinyl latex paint e. Suspension System: Prelude XL 15/16-inch Exposed Tee grid systems

D. Acoustical Panel: Bathrooms and Janitor Closets.

1. Manufacturer: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Type: IV -

a. Type XX with scrubbable finish #794 (provide #828 – 2’ x 4’ fire guard where required for fire rated ceiling system).

i. CT: Vinyl Shield A (Cashmere with Protectone where required for fire rating). ii. USG: Clean Room, Clima Plus (Fire Code). iii. Or equal as approved by the Professional.


a. Sound Control: Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC (N/A) in compliance with ASTM C423. b. Sound Transmission Class: CAC/CSTC minimum of 33 in compliance with ASTM E 1414 or ASTM E 413.

4. Surface Burning:



a. Size: 24-inch by 24-inch by 5/8 inch. b. Edge Detail: Lay-In. c. Surface: Scrubbable, Washable, Soil resistant, factory-applied plastic finish. d. Suspension System: Prelude XL 15/16-inch Exposed Tee grid systems.

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM


1. Armstrong Ceiling & Wall Solutions. 2. CertainTeed Corporation. 3. USG Corporation.

B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M and designated by type, structural classification, and finish indicated.

1. High-Humidity Finish: Where indicated, provide coating tested and classified for "severe environment performance" according to ASTM C 635/C 635M.

C. Wide-Face, Aluminum-Capped, Double-Web, Hot-Dip Galvanized, G60, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; hot-dip galvanized, G60 coating designation; with prefinished, 15/16-inch- wide aluminum caps on flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system.




2. Face Design: Flat, flush. 3. Cap Finish: Painted white.

D. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Stainless-Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel sheet, with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide, stainless-steel caps on flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 2. Face Design: Flat, flush.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Type: anchors.

B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. 3. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400. 4. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M,

Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire.

C. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

D. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- diameter bolts.

F. Hold-Down Clips: Manufacturer's standard hold-down at vestibule areas as required.

2.7 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM


1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corporation. 3. USG Corporation. 4. Or equal as approved by Professional.

B. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying with seismic design requirements.

1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M and coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.

B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated design.

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.

7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers

unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits

established by referenced standards.



C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide precise fit.

1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.

2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings.

3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.

4. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension-system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners.

5. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.

6. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated; space according to panel manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. a. Hold-Down Clips: Space 24 inches o.c. on all cross runners.

7. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts according to requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Suspended Ceilings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, non-cumulative.

B. Moldings and Trim: Install moldings and trim to substrate and level with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, non-cumulative.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage.

B. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

09 65 13 - 1 of 5

SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Thermoset-rubber base. 2. Rubber stair accessories.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents




A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following periods:



09 65 13 - 2 of 5

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F .

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE

1. Style and Location: a. Style B, Cove with top-set toe. Provide in areas with resilient floor coverings.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; a division of Burke Industries Inc. 3. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company. 4. Nora Systems, Inc. 5. Roppe Corporation, USA.

C. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).

1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous). 2. Style and Location:

a. Style B, Cove with top-set toe.

D. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

E. Height: 4 inches.

F. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

G. Outside Corners: Preformed.

H. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

I. Colors: As selected by Professional from manufacturer’s full range.

2.2 RUBBER STAIR ACCESSORIES

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; a division of Burke Industries Inc. 3. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company. 4. Nora Systems, Inc. 5. PRF USA Inc. 6. Roppe Corporation, USA.





09 65 13 - 3 of 5

C. Stair Treads with Integrated Risers: ASTM F 2169.

1. Type: TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset). 2. Class: 2 (pattern; embossed, grooved, or ribbed). 3. Group: 2 (with contrasting color for the visually impaired). 4. Nosing Style: Square, adjustable to cover angles between 60 and 90 degrees. 5. Nosing Height: 2 inches. 6. Thickness: 1/4 inch and tapered to back edge. 7. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece. 8. Integral Risers: Smooth, flat; in height that fully covers substrate.

D. Separate Risers: Smooth, flat; in height that fully covers substrate; produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation with treads.

1. Style: Coved toe, 7 inches high by length matching treads Toeless, by length matching treads. 2. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

E. Stringers: Height and length after cutting to fit risers and treads and to cover stair stringers, produced by same manufacturer as treads, and recommended by manufacturer for installation with treads.

F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Professional from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY


1. Armstrong Flooring. 2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products. 3. Johnsonite. 4. Roppe Corporation, USA. 5. VPI Corporation.

B. Description: Rubber stair-tread nosing carpet edge for glue-down applications reducer strip for resilient floor covering joiner for tile and carpet.

C. Profile and Dimensions: As requested for smooth and ADA compliant transition between resilient materials and other materials except where thresholds are indicated.

D. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Professional from manufacturer's full range.

2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. VCT Adhesive: 50 g/L. b. Cove Base Adhesive: 50 g/L.

C. Stair-Tread Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient stair-tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.

D. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient stair-tread manufacturer.




09 65 13 - 4 of 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that

contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1000 sq. ft. , and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates

have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after

substrates pass testing.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.



09 65 13 - 5 of 5

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Stair Accessories:

1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 3. For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint between units.

C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply manufacturer's recommended number of coat(s).

E. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 19 - 1 of 5

SECTION 09 65 19 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vinyl composition floor tile.



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of resilient floor tile.

1. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

2. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples: Full-size units of each color, texture, and pattern of floor tile required.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated.

E. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.

1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches long, of each color required.




A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.



1. Floor Tile: Furnish one unopened box for every boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated.



1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections. a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed by Architect and

owner. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents




A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient floor tile, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

2.2 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE VCT-1, VCT-2, VCT-3.


1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Congoleum Corporation. 3. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company.

B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through pattern.

C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.




D. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

E. Size: 12 by 12 inches.

F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Professional from manufacturer's full range.


A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by floor tile manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that

contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1000 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates

have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after

substrates pass testing.

C. Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method recommended by access flooring manufacturer.

D. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

E. Do not install floor tiles until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed.



1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

F. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles and square with room when not indicated.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket-weave pattern) in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

H. Adhere floor tiles to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Apply protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer.

1. Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer. 2. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Using Agency’s maintenance service. 3. Apply 3 coats. 4. Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until Project

Completion.



5. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels.

E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.



MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING 09 67 00- 1 of 6

Section 09 67 00 – FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fluid applied resinous flooring and 8” integral formed epoxy cove base with all necessary accessories for complete installation.

2. Preparation of existing concrete substrate.

3. Protection of adjacent materials and surfaces.

B. Related Sections:

1. Sealants: Section 07920.

2. Gypsum Drywall: Section 09250.

3. Adjacent floor finishes: Division 9.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

The publications listed below form a part of this specification only to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:

1. C-307 Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars.

2. C-501 Test Method for Relative Resistance to Wear Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber Abraser.

3. C-531 Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacing.

4. C-579 Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars and Monolithic Surfaces.

5. C-580 Test Method for Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacing.

6. C-884 Test Method for Thermal Compatibility Between Concrete and an Epoxy Resin Overlay.

7. D-570 Water Absorption of Plastics.

8. D-695 Compression Properties of Rigid Plastic.

B. Military Specifications (Mil. Spec.)

1. MIL D-3 134 F (Impact Resistance) Section 4.7.3.



2. MIL D-3 134 F (Indentation Resistance) Section 4.7.4.

3. MIL D-3234 F (Resistance to Elevated Temperature) Section 4.7.5.

C. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings (most recent edition). Committee in Concrete 403 bulletin 59-43, Bond Strength to Concrete.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Fluid-applied, Resinous Flooring specified under this section is referenced on the drawings as Flowfresh Ultra Flakes.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. System shall be a minimum 3/16” textured epoxy surfacing with broadcast vinyl flake to form a decorative skid-resistant surface. Surface topcoat(s) shall be as specified in Section 2.01.A.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples: Submit a minimum of three standard size cured samples of flooring system indicating color and non-skid properties. Approved samples will be used during installation for product match.

B. Certified Test: Submit two copies of supplier’s/manufacturer’s written certification that flooring system meets or exceeds required properties.

C. Manufacturers Application Instructions: Submit descriptive data and specific recommendations for mixing, application, curing including any precautions of special handling instructions required to comply with the Occupational Safety and Health Act.

D. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall be furnished showing installation of cove base, termination details and details at floor material transitions and where adjoining equipment.

1. Locate and provide written detailing of treatment for all types joints and repair of cracks required for flooring in area of installation.

E. Maintenance Instructions: Submit current copies of the flooring manufacturer's printed recommendations on maintenance methods and products.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins, hardening agents, and finish or sealing coats, from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials including underlayment, joint sealant, and repair materials only of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.

B. Installation shall be performed by an applicator with minimum 10 years experience in work of similar nature and scope. Installer must be approved by the manufacturer of the floor surfacing materials. The general contractor shall furnish a written statement from the manufacturer that the installer is acceptable.

C. Installer to keep daily log of the date of installation, room number, type, color, and method of application of product being installed. Log must be available for inspection by the Architect upon request.



D. Provide a full-thickness finish sample mock-up at least 2 ft x 2 ft to demonstrate texture, color, thickness, chemical resistance, cleanability, and other features of the resinous flooring. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place field sample.

1. If the initial portable mock-up is unacceptable, make adjustments to comply with requirements and apply another similar sample until acceptable.


A. Maintain the ambient room and the floor temperatures at 60 degrees Fahrenheit, or above, for a period extending from 72 hours before, during and 24 hours after floor installation. Concrete to receive surfacing shall have cured for at least 28 days and shall have been free of water for at least 7 days.

B. Dew Point: Substrate temperature must be minimum of 5 degrees above dew point prior to, during or up to 24 hours after application of flooring system.

C. Illumination: Apply flooring system only where a minimum of 30 footcandles exist when measured 3 feet from surface.

D. Advise other trades of fixtures and fittings not to be installed until flooring is cured and protected.

1.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive the flooring by masking, or by other means, to maintain these surfaces free of the flooring material.

B. Provide adequate ventilation and fire protection at all mixing and placing operations. Prohibit smoking or use of spark or flame producing devices within 50 feet of any mixing or placing operation.

C. Provide polyethylene or rubber gloves or protective creams for all workmen engaged in applying products.

1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. All materials shall be delivered to project site in original manufacturer's sealed containers including type of material, batch numbers, date of manufacture, and pertinent labels intact and legible.

B. Store materials in dry protected area at a temperature between 60° F to 80° F.

C. Follow all manufacturer's specific instructions and prudent safety practices for storage and handling.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Contractor to guarantee work under this Section to be free from defects of material and installation for the duration of the warranty period. Defects occurring during warranty period shall be repaired, in a manner satisfactory to the Owner and the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner.

1. Warranty Period: One (1) Year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Key Resin Company’s Flowcrete Flowfresh Ultra Flakes as the basis of design.

1. Key Resin Company: 888-943-4532, www.keyresin.com

2. Local Representation: Jon Lattin, 610-559-8182

B. System description: Four-component cementitious urethane based self-leveling seamless flooring with vinyl flake broadcast and sealed with UV stable epoxy and hybrid polysiloxaine topcoat. Total system thickness to be a minimum of 3/16”

C. Alternative manufacturers must have as a minimum the standards set forth in this specification and must be preapproved in accordance with project requirements. Approved manufacturers include:

1. General Polymers

2. Dur-A-Flex

3. Dex-O-Tex

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Body Coat: Flowcrete Flowfresh MF, a four-component self-leveling urethane cement.

1. Broadcast Aggregates: PVA colored vinyl chips (flakes) to match architect’s selected color.

B. Grout Coat: Key #511-UV UV-Resistant Epoxy, a clear two-component 100% UV resisting epoxy floor coating

C. Topcoat: Key #570 Epoxy-Polysiloxaine, a clear two-component, ultra high solids polysiloxaine floor

coating.

D. Provide slip-resistant, cleanable textured finish. Samples to be approved by Architect or Owner.

E. Finish: Color as selected by Architect or Owner from the manufacturer's standard or custom patterns and colors.

F. Provide expansion joint material where required for installation. Submit in shop drawing phase location of all field joints.

G. Provide 8” inch integral coved base as required by Architect or Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine conditions under which products are to be installed in

coordination with Installer of materials and components specified in this Section and notify affected General Contractors in writing, with copies to the Owner’s Representative and Architect, of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

B. When Installer confirms conditions as acceptable to ensure proper and timely installation and to ensure requirements for applicable warranty or guarantee can be satisfied, submit to General Contractor written confirmation, with copies to the Owner’s Representative and Architect, from applicable Installer. Failure to submit written confirmation and subsequent installation will be assumed to indicate conditions are acceptable to Installer.

http://www.keyresin.com/



C. Prior to commencing work, the manufacturer, General Contractor, and Installer shall conduct a walk-through to review and determine the methods of joint treatment; contractor shall submit proposed joint treatment methods to Architect for review and approval prior to installation.

D. Obtain Architect's approval of mock-up before installing flooring; specified in QUALITY ASSURANCE.

E. Preparation of Surface: 1. Inspect surfaces to receive flooring and verify that the concrete surface is smooth and free from

conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality of work.

a. Remove all projections, all debris detrimental to flooring system, dirt, oil contaminates, grease and surface coatings affecting bond.

2. Effectively remove concrete laitance by steel shot blasting or other mechanical method approved

by flooring manufacturer. Surface profile must be a minimum CSP-4 profile according to International Concrete Repair Institute Guideline #03732.

3. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete in accordance with resinous flooring manufacterer’s written instructions.

4. Moisture Testing: Verify the moisture vapor emission rate of the slab does not exceed that as

recommended by the manufacturer at time of installation of the flooring. Moisture vapor emission and moisture content testing must conform with the requirements of ASTM F-2170-19 (Relative Humidity Probe Test). If any test result shows excessive levels of moisture content or vapor emission rate beyond the material’s limits, consult the manufacturer for a recommendation on how to proceed.

5. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: perform tests recommended in writing by resinous flooring

manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity is not less than 6 or more than 8 pH unless otherwise recommended in writing by flooring manufacturer.

6. All expansion joints shall be honored through the finished flooring system. 7. Notify Architect in writing prior to commencing work of any conditions deemed unsatisfactory for

the installation; installation of flooring materials is understood as acceptance of the substrate as satisfactory.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install all floor materials in strict conformance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. All control joints, expansion joints and cold joints must be exposed through the system.

C. Integral Cove Base: Where scheduled, provide integral epoxy cove base from flooring up the wall as specified. Trowel the material up wall to form smooth, integral transition and base 8” inches high unless otherwise indicated or scheduled.

D. Place urethane cement mixture and spread to a dense flat surface. Maintaining a wet edge between mixes, establish the material thickness. Before surface has set, broadcast flake to excess. Allow to cure minimum of 8 hours at room temperature (75 degrees F) and sweep/vacuum excess aggregate from surface. If necessary, follow with a flake broadcast into Key #511 and allow to cure and sweep/vacuum excess aggregate from surface.

E. Seal surface with grout and top coats following recommended recoat and cure times to achieve approved non-skid texture. Be careful not to puddle resins.



F. Match finished work to approved sample; uniform in thickness, color, texture and free from defects detrimental to appearance.

3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Apply temporary protection until floor is fully cured. The General Contractor shall protect the finished floor from the time that the sub-contractor completes the work.

B. Dispose of waste properly.

C. Comply with waste management and recycling program requirements.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 1 of 6

SECTION 09 68 13 - TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Modular carpet tile.


1. Section 09 65 13 "Resilient Base and Accessories" Section 09 65 19 "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile.



1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited to, the following: a. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures. b. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. c. Review subfloor preparation procedures.



1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include manufacturer's written installation recommendations for each type of substrate.

B. Shop Drawings: For carpet tile installation, plans showing the following:

1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles.

2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials.

C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples.



D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of carpet tile.

1. Include Samples of exposed edge, transition, and other accessory stripping involving color or finish selection.

E. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples.

F. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.



B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Carpet Tile: Provide one unopened carton for each type indicated.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockups at locations and in sizes as directed by Professional. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work



A. Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104.


A. Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.



B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.

2. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. More than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, and runs. b. Dimensional instability. c. Excess static discharge. d. Loss of tuft-bind strength. e. Loss of face fiber. f. Delamination.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET TILE CRP -1, CRP-2, CRP-3


1. Interface, LLC. 2. J&J Invision; J&J Industries, Inc. 3. Patcraft; a division of Shaw Industries, Inc. 4. Shaw Contract Group; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

1.1 CARPET TILE, TYPE #1

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: or product of equal quality, pattern and texture in corridors, offices, and instructional areas.

1. Interface Flor Furrows II Glasbac Tile, Style #14669, (Three colors throughout project).

a. Carpet Type: Tile. b. Standard Size: 50 cm x 50 cm (19.69 in. x 19.69 in.) c. Product Construction: Tufted Textured Loop d. Soil/Stain Protection: Protekt2 e. Antimicrobial Treatment: (AATCC 138 Washed) AATCC 174 Parts 2&3)Intersept f. Yarn System: Type 6.6 Nylon g. Post-Industrial: 48% h. Post-Consumer: 2% i. Total Recycled Content: 50% j. Tufted Yarn Weight: 17 oz./yd.2 (576 g/m2) k. Machine Gauge: 1/12 in. (47.2 ends/10 cm) l. Pile Height: .13 in. (3.3 mm) m. Pile Thickness: .117 in. (3 mm) n. Stitches: 8.66/in. (34.09442 ends/10 cm)




o. Pile Density: 5231 p. Indoor Air Quality: Green Label Plus Certified #GLP0820 q. Sustainable Carpet Assessment Standard: NSF-140 Gold r. Radiant Panel: (ASTM E-648) Class 1 s. Smoke Density: (ASTM E-662) t. Lightfastness: (AATCC 16 – E) u. Static: (AATCC – 134) < 3.0 KV

2. CARPET TILE: CPT #2

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following in residence rooms:

1) Interface Flor: Cubic.

b. Color: To be selected by Professional from manufacturer’s full range of colors. c. Fiber Content: Aquafil Struttura d. Pile Characteristic: Tufted Textured Loop. e. Tufted Yarn Weight: 18 oz/yd. f. Pile Thickness: 0.093 in. g. Stitches: 8.16 per inch. h. Gage: 1/12 inch. i. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Glas Bac ® Re Tile. j. Secondary Backing: Manufacturer’s standard material. k. Size: 19.69 x 19.69 inches (50 x 50 cm). l. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Protekt. m. Antimicrobial Treatment: Intercept ® (AATCC 138 washed) (AATCC 174 Parts 2 and 3).

3. CARPET TILE: CPT #3

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following in residence rooms:

1) Interface Flor: SR999.

b. Color: To be selected by Professional from manufacturer’s full range of colors. c. Fiber Content: Aquafil Nylon d. Pile Characteristic: Tufted Textured Loop. e. Tufted Yarn Weight: 27 oz/yd. f. Pile Thickness: 0.127 in. g. Stitches: 10 per inch. h. Gage: 1/12 inch. i. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Glas Bac ® Re Tile. j. Secondary Backing: Manufacturer’s standard material. k. Size: 19.69 x 19.69 inches (50 x 50 cm). l. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Protekt. m. Antimicrobial Treatment: Intercept ® (AATCC 138 washed) (AATCC 174 Parts 2 and 3).

D. Or equal as approved by the Professional.

2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile, and are recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.

1. VOC Limits: Provide adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when tested according to ASTM D 5116:

a. Total VOCs: 10.00 mg/sq. m x h.



b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq. m x h. c. 2-Ethyl-1-Hexanol: 3.00 mg/sq. m x h.

C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with miLL finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance.

B. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

C. Concrete Slabs: Verify that finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and that surfaces are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.

1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1000 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates

have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F2170. Proceed with installation only after

substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. c. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile

manufacturers. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

D. Wood Subfloors: Verify the following:

1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing." 2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or

show through surface.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104 and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers.

D. Metal Substrates: Clean grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if recommended in writing by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive.

E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104, Section 10, "Carpet Tile," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Installation Method: Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive.

C. Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

D. Maintain pile-direction patterns indicated on Drawings.

E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.

I. Access Flooring: Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not fill seams of access flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104, Section 13.7.

C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.



MAROTTA / MAIN ARCHITECTS INTERIOR PAINTING

09 91 23 - 1 of 9

SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATIONS

A. The specifications sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and “Division 01 – General Requirements” form a part of this section by this reference thereto, and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint and encapsulation systems on the following interior substrates within the areas of construction:

1. Concrete. 2. Clay masonry. 3. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 4. Steel. 5. Galvanized metal. 6. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). 7. Wood. 8. Gypsum board. 9. Plaster.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 2. Division 06 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section. 3. Divisions 15 and 16 for coordination with newly installed equipment and materials.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.



09 91 23 - 2 of 9

1.4 QUALITY CONTROL

A. MPI Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting

Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.

B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Professional will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Professional will designate items or areas required.

2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated.

3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Professional at no added cost to the Department.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL

A. Furnish extra materials from same product run that match products installed in unopened cans and identified with labels describing color and paint type.

1. Interior Paint: Provide one gallon for each color and paint type.



09 91 23 - 3 of 9

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Paint and Coatings Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc 3. Sherwin-Williams Company

2.2 PAINT & COATINGS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 3. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of

total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 4. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:

a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. l. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury. s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. u. Methylene chloride. v. Naphthalene. w. Toluene (methylbenzene). x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride.



09 91 23 - 4 of 9

C. Colors: As selected by Professional from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 BLOCK FILLERS

A. Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Block Filler: MPI #4.

B. Epoxy Block Filler: MPI #116.

2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.

B. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint systems indicated: MPI #36.

C. Sealer Concrete Floors: MPI #99.

D. Bonding Primer: MPI #17

2.5 METAL PRIMERS

A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.

B. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76.

C. Rust-Inhibitive Primer (Water Based): MPI #107.

D. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134.

E. Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95.

F. Cleaner Etching: MPI #25.

2.6 WOOD PRIMERS

A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.

B. Semi-Transparent Wood Stain: MPI #90.

2.7 ACRYLIC LATEX PAINTS

A. Interior Acrylic Latex (Eggshell): MPI #144.

B. Interior Acrylic Latex (Semigloss): MPI #147.

C. Interior Acrylic Latex (Gloss): MPI #114.

D. High Performance Architectural Latex: MPI #141.

E. Interior and exterior bonding primer: MPI #17



09 91 23 - 5 of 9

2.8 WATERBASED EPOXY

A. Pre-Catalyzed waterbased epoxy: MPI #153

2.9 QUICK-DRYING ENAMELS

A. Quick-Drying Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #81 (Gloss Level 5).

2.10 ALUMINUM PAINT

A. Aluminum Paint: MPI #1.

2.11 WOOD FINISHES

A. Polyurethane Finish: MPI #57.

2.12 FLOOR COATINGS

A. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Solvent Based): MPI #104.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.



09 91 23 - 6 of 9

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove mildew before painting by washing with a solution of 1 part liquid household bleach and 3 parts of warm water. Apply the solution and scrub the mildewed area. Allow the solution to remain on the surface for 10 minutes. Rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow the surface to dry 48 hours before painting. Wear protective glasses or goggles, waterproof gloves, and protective clothing. Quickly wash off any of the mixture that comes in contact with your skin. Do not add detergents or ammonia to the bleach/water solution.

2. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Clay Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content of surfaces or alkalinity of mortar joints to be painted exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation.

J. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler.

Sand smooth when dried.

K. Gypsum Board & Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints and coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before

final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.



09 91 23 - 7 of 9

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical Work:

a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and

outlets. f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other

paintable jacket material. g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.

2. Plumbing Work:

a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. e. Equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other

paintable jacket material. f. Plumbing equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.

3. Electrical Work:

a. Switchgear. b. Panelboards. c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.


A. Testing of Paint Materials: Department of General Services reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as the Department deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:

1. Engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Department of General Services may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show

materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.



09 91 23 - 8 of 9


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Professional, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Vertical Surfaces:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex eggshell, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52.

B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:

1. Clear Sealer System:

a. First Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (water based), MPI #99. b. Topcoat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (water based), MPI #99.

C. Clay-Masonry Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer, MPI #4. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #144.

D. CMU Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler, MPI #4. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #144.

E. Steel Substrates:

1. Quick-Drying Enamel System:

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer, MPI #76. b. Intermediate Coat: Quick-drying enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Quick-drying enamel, (Gloss Level 7), MPI #96.

2. Aluminum Paint System:



09 91 23 - 9 of 9

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer, MPI #79. b. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint, MPI #1. c. Topcoat: Aluminum paint, MPI #1.

F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. High Performance Architectural Latex System.

a. Prime Coat: Galvanized, water based MPI #134. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex interior, high performance architectural matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI

#141.

G. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates:

1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum, MPI #95. b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #141.

H. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork.

1. Alkyd System:

a. Prime Coat: Stain. b. Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane, clear. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd polyurethane, clear.

I. High-Performance Architectural Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #141.

J. Wood Panel Substrates: Including painted plywood, medium-density fiberboard and hardboard.

1. Alkyd System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex for interior woodwork, MPI #39. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior matching top coat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52.

K. Gypsum Board & Plaster Substrates:

1. High Performance Architectural Latex Over Latex Primer System:

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex, high performance architectural (Gloss Level 3), MPI #140.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 10 11 00 - 1 of 5

SECTION 10 11 00 - VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Visual display board assemblies, tack board.





1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes, and accessories for visual display units.

B. Shop Drawings: For visual display units.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work. 2. Show locations of panel joints. 3. Show locations and layout of special-purpose graphics. 4. Include sections of typical trim members.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of visual display unit indicated, for units with factory-applied color finishes, and as follows:

1. Samples of facings for each visual display panel type, indicating color and texture. 2. Actual factory-finish color samples, applied to aluminum wood substrate. 3. Include accessory Samples to verify color selected.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of visual display unit indicated.

1. Visual Display Panel: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches, with facing, core, and backing indicated for final Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and texture required.

2. Trim: 6-inch- long sections of each trim profile. 3. Display Rail: 6-inch- long section of each type. 4. Accessories: Full-size Sample of each type of accessory.

E. Product Schedule: For visual display units.



B. Product Test Reports: For each visual display unit, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.




A. Maintenance Data: For visual display units to include in maintenance manuals.




1. Build mockup of typical visual display unit as shown on Drawings. Include accessories. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained

in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work



A. Deliver factory-fabricated visual display units completely assembled in one piece. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured unit size, or if unit size is impracticable to ship in one piece, provide two or more pieces with joints in locations indicated on approved Shop Drawings.

B. Store visual display surfaces vertically with packing materials between each unit.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display units until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities. b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking.

2. Warranty Period: Life of the building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

2.2 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARD ASSEMBLY

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:




1. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.

B. Visual Display Board Assembly: factory fabricated.

1. Assembly: Plastic impregnated cork. 2. Corners: Square. 3. Width: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Height: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Mounting Method: Direct to wall.

C. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch- thick, extruded aluminum; standard size and shape.

1. Field-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard, snap-on trim with no visible screws or exposed joints. 2. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodic finish.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities.

D. Joints: Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to Architect.

2.3 TACKBOARD PANELS

A. Tackboard Panels:

1. Facing: plastic-impregnated cork.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Plastic-Impregnated-Cork Sheet: Seamless, homogeneous, self-sealing sheet consisting of granulated cork, linseed oil, resin binders, and dry pigments that are mixed and calendared onto fabric backing; with washable vinyl finish and integral color throughout; with surface-burning characteristics indicated.

B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.

C. Adhesives for Field Application: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive for use with specific type of panels, sheets, or assemblies; and for substrate application; as recommended in writing by visual display unit manufacturer.

1. <Click to insert sustainable design text for VOC content of adhesive.> 2. <Click to insert sustainable design text for low emitting adhesives.>

D. Primer/Sealer: Mildew-resistant primer/sealer complying with requirements in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting" and recommended in writing by visual display unit manufacturer for intended substrate.


A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA 500 for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

http://www.arcomnet.com/sustainable_design.aspx?topic=142#http://www.arcomnet.com/sustainable_design.aspx?topic=142

http://www.arcomnet.com/sustainable_design.aspx?topic=140#http://www.arcomnet.com/sustainable_design.aspx?topic=140



B. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of connections before installation of motorized, sliding visual display units.

C. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display units.

D. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth where sliding visual display units will be installed.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.

B. Clean substrates of substances, such as dirt, mold, and mildew, that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards.

C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual display units and wall surfaces.

D. Prime wall surfaces indicated to receive visual display units and as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and visual display unit manufacturer.

E. Prepare recesses for sliding visual display units as required by type and size of unit.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.

B. Field-Assembled Visual Display Board Assemblies: Coordinate field-assembled units with grounds, trim, and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.

1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, as acceptable to Architect and as indicated on approved Shop Drawings.

2. Where size of visual display board assemblies or other conditions require support in addition to normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard structural support accessories to suit conditions indicated.

C. Factory-Fabricated Visual Display Board Assemblies: Adhere to wall surfaces with egg-size adhesive gobs at 16 inches o.c., horizontally and vertically.

D. 16 inches o.c. Secure tops and bottoms of boards to walls.

E. Visual Display Board Assembly Mounting Heights: Install visual display units at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below.

1. Mounting Height: 36 inches above finished floor to top of chalktray.




A. Clean visual display units in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one removable cleaning instructions label to visual display unit in each room.

B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

C. Cover and protect visual display units after installation and cleaning.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS ROOM-IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE

10 14 23.16 - 1 of 6

SECTION 10 14 23.16 - ROOM-IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes room-identification signs that are directly attached to the building.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Furnish templates for placement of sign-anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers.

B. Furnish templates for placement of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers.



B. Shop Drawings: For room-identification signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other installers,

and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille, and layout for

each sign at least half size.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish.

1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows:

1. Room-Identification Signs: Full-size Sample. 2. Variable Component Materials: Full-size Sample of each base material, character (letter, number, and

graphic element) in each exposed color and finish not included in Samples above. 3. Exposed Accessories: Full-size Sample of each accessory type. 4. Full-size Samples, if approved, will be returned to Contractor for use in Project.

E. Product Schedule: For room-identification signs. Use same designations indicated on Drawings or in a sign schedule.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.



10 14 23.16 - 2 of 6


A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.



1. Variable Component Materials: 12 replaceable text inserts and interchangeable characters (letters, numbers, and graphic elements) of each type.

2. Tools: One set(s) of specialty tools for assembling signs and replacing variable sign components.




A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices and electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image. c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Thermal Movements: For exterior signs, allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

B. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for signs.

2.2 PANEL SIGNAGE TYPES


a. ACE Sign Systems, Inc. b. APCO Graphics, Inc. c. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. d. Best Sign Systems, Inc. e. Mohawk Sign Systems. f. Nelson-Harkins Industries.




10 14 23.16 - 3 of 6

B. Room-Identification Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:

1. Acrylic Sheet: 0.080 inch (2.03 mm) thick. a. Edge Condition: Square cut. b. Corner Condition: Square. c. Mounting: Framed and wall mounted with concealed anchors.

1) Extruded-Aluminum Frames: Mitered with concealed anchors. a) Color: As selected by Professional from manufacturer's full range. b) Depth: Not less than ½”. c) Profile: Square. d) Corner Condition: Square.

d. Custom Paint Colors: Match Pantone color matching system. 1) Color: As selected by Professional from manufacturer's full range.

e. Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape. 1) Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

f. Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils (0.076 mm) with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing. Apply copy to exposed face of panel sign. 1) Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet.

C. Provide New ADA Compliant Room Panel Signs at each location a new door is installed:

1. Classroom Signs: Provide and Install Framed Room Signage outside each classroom door. a. Sign Size: Not less than 6-inches by 6-inches, and as required to accommodate text size and

length. b. Text Format: Room Number and Room Designation.

2. Administrative Office Signs: Provide and Install Framed Room Signage outside each office door and as indicated. a. Sign Size: Not less than 6-inches by 6-inches, and as required to accommodate text size and


3. Specialty Room Signs: Provide and Install Framed Room Signage outside each Specialty Room door. a. Sign Size: Not less than 6-inches by 6-inches, and as required to accommodate text size and


4. Accessibility Signage, Restrooms, Accessible Route, Stairs, Elevator, Directional: Provide and Install Framed Room Signage outside accessible locations, and as required

to meet the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act – 1990 (ADA) and ANSI A117.1-1992. a. Sign Size: Not less than 8-inches by 8-inches, and as required to accommodate text size and

length. b. Text Format: Centered, Symbols and Room Designation. c. Insert: Acrylic insert, computer generated vinyl lettering.

d. Symbols: 4-inch accessibility symbols and gender symbol (if applicable), with the verbal description placed directly below followed by Grade 2 Braille.

5. Entrance Signage, Lobby Entrances: Provide and Install Framed Room Signage outside at Exterior Lobby Entrance doors. a. Sign Size: Not less than 9-inches by 9-inches, and as required to accommodate text size and

length. b. Text Format: Centered, Symbols and Room Designation. c. Insert: Acrylic insert, computer generated vinyl lettering.

d. Symbols: 4-inch accessibility symbol with the verbal description “ENTRANCE” placed directly below followed by Grade 2 Braille.

6. Directional Signage: Provide directional signage indicating the route to the nearest like accessible element at the following locations: Inaccessible building entrances, inaccessible public toilets and



10 14 23.16 - 4 of 6

bathing facilities, elevators separate sex toilets indicating the location of the nearest accessible unisex toilets and exits not providing an accessible route.

7. At each door to an egress stairway, exit passageway and discharge, provide a tactile exit sign.

8. At areas of rescue assistance, provide signage at each door leading to an area of rescue assistance at two-way communication stations, and provide instructional signage for two-way communication station.

9. At exterior areas of rescue assistance provide both visual and tactile signage that states“ EXTERIOR AREA FOR ASSISTED RESCUE”, including the International symbol of Accessibility.

10. Provide a tactile sign stating “EXIT” adjacent to each door to an egress stairway, an exit passageway and the exit discharge.

2.3 SIGN MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.

C. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF (UV filtering).

D. Vinyl Film: UV-resistant vinyl film with pressure-sensitive, permanent adhesive; die cut to form characters or images as indicated on Drawings and suitable for exterior applications.

E. Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended by manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant for colors and exposure indicated.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signs, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:

1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized devices unless otherwise

indicated. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inters, as required to be set into concrete or masonry work.

3. Sign Mounting Fasteners: a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of sign material

or screwed into back of sign assembly unless otherwise indicated. b. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of head indicated,

and installed in predrilled holes.

B. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch thick, with adhesive on both sides only on glass substrates.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly.

2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention.

3. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous.



10 14 23.16 - 5 of 6

4. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.

B. Subsurface-Applied Graphics: Apply graphics to back face of clear face-sheet material to produce precisely formed image. Image shall be free of rough edges.

C. Subsurface-Etched Graphics: Reverse etch back face of clear face-sheet material. Fill resulting copy with manufacturer's standard enamel. Apply opaque manufacturer's standard background color coating over enamel-filled copy.

D. Signs with Changeable Message Capability: Fabricate signs to allow insertion of changeable messages as follows:

1. For snap-in changeable inserts beneath removable face sheet, furnish one suction or other device to assist in removing face sheet. Furnish initial changeable insert. Furnish two blank inserts for each sign for Owner's use.

2. For slide-in changeable inserts, fabricate slot without burrs or constrictions that inhibit function. Furnish initial changeable insert. Furnish two blank inserts for each sign for Owner's use.

3. For frame to hold changeable sign panel, fabricate frame without burrs or constrictions that inhibit function. Furnish initial sign panel.


A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair

installation.

B. Accessibility: Install signs in locations on walls according to the accessibility standard.

C. Mounting Methods:

1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface. a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced

adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.



10 14 23.16 - 6 of 6

2. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as template. Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install through fasteners and tighten.

3. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage adhesive. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

4. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage tape adhesive.

5. Hook-and-Loop Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply sign component of two-part tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign without slippage; push to engage tape adhesive. Keep tape strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges when sign is initially installed or reinstalled. Apply substrate component of tape to substrate in locations aligning with tape on back of sign; push and rub well to fully engage tape adhesive to substrate.

6. Magnetic Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges. Place sign in position.


A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13.19 - 1 of 4

SECTION 10 21 13.19 - PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Toilet Enclosures: Overhead braced, floor anchored. 2. Urinal Screens: Wall hung, overhead braced, floor anchored. 3. Solid polymer vanities and wall mounted supports.


1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry for blocking and overhead support of floor-and-ceiling-anchored compartments.

2. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for blocking. 3. Section 10 28 00 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for accessories mounted on toilet

compartments.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate requirements for overhead supports, blocking, reinforcing, and other supports concealed within wall and ceiling.


A. Product Data:

1. Solid-plastic toilet compartments: a. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and

profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments.

B. Shop Drawings: For solid-plastic toilet compartments.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details. 2. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. 4. Show locations of floor drains. 5. Show overhead support or bracing locations. 6. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment mounted grab bars.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard color sheets, showing full range of available colors for each type of toilet compartment material indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: Actual sample of finished products for each type of toilet compartment indicated.

1. Size: 6-inch- square, of same thickness indicated for Work. 2. Include each type of hardware and accessory.

E. Product Schedule: For toilet compartments, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing location and selected colors for toilet compartment material.


A. Certificates:



1. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment by manufacturer.


A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements, and coordinate before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire Performance: Tested in accordance with, and pass the acceptance criteria of, NFPA 286.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Department of Justice 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design and ICC A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.

2.2 SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS


1. Accurate Partitions Corp., an ASI Group Company. 2. American Sanitary Partition Corporation. 3. Global Partitions Corp., an ASI Group Company. 4. Scranton Products.

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced Floor anchored.

C. Entrance-Screen Style: Overhead braced Floor anchored.

D. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung Floor anchored Overhead braced Post to ceiling.

E. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material.

1. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges. 2. Doors and dividing panels shall be 55” high and mounted at 14” AFF. An aluminum hear sink may be

fastened to the bottom edges (optional). 3. Pilasters shall be 82” high (standard) and fastened to a 3” high pilaster shoe with stainless steel tamper

resistant torx head sex bolt. 4. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 Vanities and supports shall be 1” thick constructed from High-Density Polyethelene (HDPE) resins. Vanities shall be fabricated from polymer resins compounded under high pressure, forming a single component which is waterproof, nonabsorbent and has a self-lubricating surface that resists marks from pens, pencils, markers and other writing instruments. All plastic components shall be covered with a protective plastic masking.

1. Vanity tops, back splashes, side splashes, skirts, center supports, and end supports shall be 1” thick with all edges rounded to a 1/4” radius. Standard vanity size is 24” wide by customer specific length not to exceed 120” for a single piece.

2. Vanity to attach to the wall and other plastic supports using 16” long heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy) angle brackets.




2.4 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

a. Door hardware shall be as noted:

1. Hinges shall be 8” and fabricated from heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy) with bright dip anodized finish with wrap-around flanges, through bolted to doors and pilasters with stainless steel, torx head sex bolts. Hinges operate with field adjustable nylon cams. Cams can be field set in 30-degree increments OR, hinges shall be integral, fabricated from the door and pilaster with no exposed metal parts.

2. Door strike/keeper shall be 6” long and made of heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy) with a bright dip anodized finish and secured to the pilasters with stainless steel tamper resistant torx head sex bolts. Bumper shall be made of extruded black vinyl.

3. Latch and housing shall be made of heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy). The latch housing shall have a bright dip anodized finish, and the slide bolt and button shall have a black anodized finish.

4. Each door shall be supplied with one coat hook/bumper and door pull made of chrome plated zamak. Handicapped doors shall be supplied with a second door pull and out swing doors with one door stop made of chrome plated zamak.

B. Pilaster shoes shall be 3” high (type 304, 20 gauge) stainless steel. Pilaster shoes shall be secured to the pilaster with a stainless steel tamper resistant torx head sex bolt.

C. Wall brackets shall be in colors, 1 ½” stirrup type made of heavy-duty aluminum (6463-T5 alloy) with a bright dip anodized finish. Stirrup brackets shall be fastened to pilasters and panels with stainless steel tamper resistant torx head sex bolts.

D. Headrail/overhead bracing shall be made of heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy) with anti-grip design and integrated curtain track. The headrail shall have a clear anodized finish and shall be fastened to the headrail bracket by a stainless steel tamper resistant torx head sex bolt, and fastened at the top of the pilaster with stainless steel tamper resistant torx head screws.

E. Headrail brackets shall be 20 gauge stainless steel with a satin finish and secured to the wall with a stainless steel tamper resistant torx head screws.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B26/B26M.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221.

C. Zamac: ASTM B86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories where required for attachment of toilet accessories.

B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

C. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

D. Urinal-Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts. Provide shoes at posts to conceal anchorage.



E. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide, inswinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide, outswinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION OF PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

1. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.

2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than two brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. a. Locate wall brackets, so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels and adjust, so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.

C. Floor-Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb, and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust, so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position.

D. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on inswinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on outswinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS WALL PROTECTION 10 26 00 - 1 of 4

SECTION 10 26 00 - WALL PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Corner guards.


1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for steel angle corner guards.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of wall protection showing locations and extent.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall-protection unit indicated, in each color and texture specified.

1. Include Samples of accent strips and accessories to verify color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following products, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Wall Guards: 12 inches long. Include examples of joinery, corners, and field splices. 2. Corner Guards: 12 inches long. Include example top caps.


A. Qualification data for qualified installer.

B. Material certificates: For each impact-resistant plastic material from manufacturer.

C. Material test reports: For each impact-resistant plastic material.

D. Warranty: Sample of warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit to include in maintenance manuals.



1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining optimum condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to plastic finishes and performance.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall protection units from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of impact-resistant wall protection units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Section 01400 "Quality Control Testing Services."

D. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall protection units with surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another qualified testing agency.

E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

F. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Store wall and door protection in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during the period plastic materials are stored.

2. Keep plastic materials out of direct sunlight. 3. Store plastic wall- and door-protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material

attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F. a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures. b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Project Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain wall protection products from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.



2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities] [and] [ICC A117.1.

2.3 CORNER GUARDS

A. Surface-Mounted, Opaque-Plastic Corner Guards: Fabricated as one piece from PVC plasti acrylic-modified vinyl sheet or opaque polycarbonate sheet; with formed edges; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following [provide products by one of the following: a. Construction Specialties, Inc. b. WallGuard.com. c. Or equal as approved by Professional.

2. Wing Size: Nominal 1-1/2 “ by 1-1/2 “. 3. Mounting: Adhesive. 4. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Plastic Materials: Chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant plastic with integral color throughout; extruded and sheet material as required, thickness as indicated.

B. Adhesive: As recommended by protection product manufacturer.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate wall and door protection according to requirements indicated for design, performance, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.

B. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.

C. Quality: Fabricate components with uniformly tight seams and joints and with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls to which wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners.




1. For wall protection attached with adhesive, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing wall and door protection.

B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Installation Quality: Install wall and door protection according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.

B. Mounting: Install wall protection in locations as indicated on Drawings. Mounting heights begin bottom edge at top of wall base and run to 60” AFF.

C. Accessories: Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, trim, joint moldings, and other accessories required for a complete installation.

1. Adjust top caps as required to ensure tight seams.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard ammonia-based household cleaning agent.

B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

10 28 00 - 1 of 5

SECTION 10 28 00 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Public-use shower room accessories. 3. Hand dryers. 4. Underlavatory guards. 5. Custodial accessories.


1. Section 09 30 13 "Ceramic Tiling" for ceramic toilet and bath accessories.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.




2. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation.

3. Include electrical characteristics.

B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated.

C. Identify accessories using designations indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.



10 28 00 - 2 of 5

2.2 PRIVATE / PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. American Specialties, Inc. (ASI) 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. (B) 3. Bradley Corporation (BR) 4. Or equal as approved by the Professional.

B. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: ASI 0697-GAL / B2840 / BR5263 2. Description: Stainless steel shelf and double-roll toilet tissue dispenser. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Operation: Rollers; theft resistant spindle. 5. Capacity: Designed for 2-1800 sheet tissue rolls. 6. Material and Finish: 18 ga. stainless steel, Type 304 finish (satin). 7. Provide one in each water closet stall.

C. Grab Bar: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: ASI, 1 ½” Series / B-6806 Series / BR 817 Series. 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 18-8 stainless steel type 304.

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area. 4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Provide grab bars in each ADA shower stall and ADA water closet stall.

D. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: ASI 0852 / BR 4A10 / B-270 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Material: Type 304 stainless steel. a. Satin finish. 4. Operation: Cover flips up, with continuous hinge along back face. 5. Nominal Size: 8” x 9.5” x 4” deep. 6. Provide one in each lavatory stall: 1st Floor Unit C Bathroom, and all Women’s Restrooms.

E. Mirror Unit: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: ASI Model 0535 / B-294 Series / BR 740 Series 2. Frame: Stainless steel, fixed tilt.

a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth. 3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below.

a. Concealed tamper resistant locking devices. 4. Mirror: Tempered glass. 5. Size: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Provide one above each lavatory sink.

F. Shower Curtain and Hooks: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: B.O.D. Bobrick 204-2, 204-1 2. Material: Vinyl, minimum 0.008 inch thick, opaque, matte. 3. Color: White. 4. Grommets: Corrosion resistant at minimum 6 inches o.c. through top hem. 5. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless steel, spring wire curtain hooks with snap fasteners

sized to accommodate specified curtain rod. Provide one hook per curtain grommet.

G. Folding Shower Seat: 1. Configuration: L-shaped seat, designed for wheelchair access. 2. Seat: Phenolic or polymeric composite of slat-type or one-piece construction in color as selected by

Architect. 3. Mounting Mechanism: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin).



10 28 00 - 3 of 5

H. Robe Hook: 1. Description: Double prong unit. 2. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin).

2.3 HAND DRYERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Dryer, Inc. 3. American Specialties, Inc. 4. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 5. Bradley Corporation. 6. Excel Dryer Corporation. 7. World Dryer Corporation. 8. Dyson B2B, Inc. 9. Or equal as approved by the Professional.

B. Warm-Air Dryer: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Xlerator Model XL-W hand dryer with recess kit. 2. Mounting: Recessed. 3. Operation: Touch-button activated with timed power cut-off switch.

a. Operation Time: 10 to 15 seconds. 4. Cover Material and Finish: Die Cast Aluminum with baked white enamel finish. 5. Electrical Requirements: 110 V, 12.5 amps, 60 Hz. 6. Warranty: 5 years. 7. Provide where shown on drawings.

2.4 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Sloan. 2. Truebro, Inc. 3. Zurn. 4. Or equal as approved by the Professional.

B. Basin Guard: Trubro BasinGuard, Basis of Design 1. Material: Bolteron Rigwall E™ vinyl 2. Properties: High-impact, stain-resistant 3. Nominal Wall: .093” 4. Durometer: 69 – Shore D 5. Finish: Fine haircell 6. UV Protection: Will not fade or discolor 7. Durability: Virtually indestructible 8. Fasteners: Fastening screws provided 9. Color: Soft beige or China white 10. Compatibility: Fits ADA-compliant lavatories with countertops and sidewalls, up to 42” 11. Paintability: Apply acrylic enamel 12. UL Listing: ASTM E-84 fire hazard listing 13. NFPA Code: Life Safety Code 101 Class A** 14. Provide at each counter mounted ADA lavatory.

C. Lavatory Shield: Trubro Lav Shield, Basis of Design 1. Material: Molded Ridged vinyl 2. Properties: High-impact, stain-resistant 3. Nominal Wall: 1/8 in., 3.17 mm 4. Durometer: 69 – Shore A 5. Finish: Fine haircell 6. UV Protection: Will not fade or discolor



10 28 00 - 4 of 5

7. Durability: Virtually indestructible 8. Fasteners: 7 steel fasteners provided 9. Color: China white 10. Compatibility: Fits all ADA-conforming 20” x 18” wall-hung china lavatories 11. Paintability: Apply acrylic enamel 12. Flamability: UL-94 V-0 Rating 13. Provide at each wall hung ADA lavatory.

2.5 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation. 4. Or equal as approved by the Professional.

B. Mop and Broom Holder:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: ASI 1308 / B-239 / BR-9934. 2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders. 3. Length: 34” 4. Hooks: 4 5. Mop/Broom Holders: 4 spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

a. Shelf: 18-8 stainless steel, type 304, No. 18 gauge. 7. Provide 1 unit in each janitor closet.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, 0.031-inch- minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

B. Brass: ASTM B19, flat products; ASTM B16/B16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B30, castings.

C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-inch- minimum nominal thickness.

D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.

E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A153/A153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer or specified in this Section, and tamper and theft resistant where exposed, and of stainless or galvanized steel where concealed.

G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

H. Mirrors: ASTM C1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of [six] <Insert number> keys to Owner's representative.



10 28 00 - 5 of 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

1. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

B. Grab Bars: Install to comply with specified structural-performance requirements.

C. Shower Seats: Install to comply with specified structural-performance requirements.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 24 13 - 1 of 5

SECTION 12 24 13 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manually operated roller shades with single rollers.


1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories.

2. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for light-blocking shades with a sealant.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shade band materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.

1. Motor-Operated Shades: Include details of installation and diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 10 inches long.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of shade band material.

1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade.

1. Shade band Material: Not less than 10 inches square. Mark interior face of material if applicable. 2. Roller Shade: Full-size operating unit, not less than 16 inches wide by 36 inches long for each type of

roller shade indicated. 3. Installation Accessories: Full-size unit, not less than 10 inches long.

F. Product Schedule: For roller shades. Indicate room numbers indicated on drawings.



B. Product Certificates: For each type of shade band material.

C. Product Test Reports: For each type of shade band material, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.



1. Roller Shades: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size, color, and shadeband material indicated, but no fewer than two units.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.



2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Draper Inc. 2. FlexShade. 3. MechoShade Systems, Inc. 4. Or equal as approved by Professional.




B. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.

1. Bead Chains: Nickel-plated metal. a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade. b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops. c. Chain-Retainer Type: Chain tensioner, jamb mounted.

C. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.

1. Roller Drive-End Location: As indicated by Professional on shop drawings. 2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller. 3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.

D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated.

E. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly.

F. Shadebands:

1. Shadeband Material: Series SB 9100 in all dorms. 3% open woven mesh in communal areas. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.

a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material. b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

G. Installation Accessories:

1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners. a. Shape: L-shaped.

2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps. 3. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer’s full range.

2.3 SHADEBAND MATERIALS

A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

B. Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant in communal areas.

1. Source: Roller shade manufacturer. 2. Type: Woven PVC-coated fiberglass and PVC-coated polyester. 3. Weave: Basketweave. 4. Thickness: .016. 5. Weight: 12 oz. 6. Roll Width: As required. 7. Openness Factor: 1 percent. 8. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Light-Blocking Fabric: Opaque fabric, stain and fade resistant for dorm rooms.

1. Source: Roller shade manufacturer. 2. Type: Fiberglass with acrylic backing. 3. Thickness: .013. 4. Weight: 12.



5. Roll Width: As required. 6. Features: Washable and stain resistant. 7. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.4 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION

A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.

B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F:

1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2-inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch. Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch.

2. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings.

C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible, except as follows:

1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4 , provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion of the material.

2. Skylight Shades: Provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband as required to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion or sag of material.

3. Railroaded Materials: Railroad material where material roll width is less than the required width of shadeband and where indicated. Provide battens and seams as required by railroaded material to produce shadebands with full roll-width panel(s) plus, if required, one partial roll-width panel located at top of shadeband.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION

A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Opaque Shadebands: Located so shadeband is not closer than 1 inch to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.

B. Roller Shade Locations: At exterior windows.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.


A. Clean roller shade surfaces, after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.



B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain motor-operated roller shades.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS MANUFACTURED PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD CASEWORK

12 35 53 - 1 of 9

SECTION 12 32 16 - MANUFACTURED PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD CASEWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Plastic-laminate-clad casework. 2. Casework hardware and accessories.


1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring casework. 2. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for reinforcements in metal-framed partitions for

anchoring casework. 3. Section 09 65 13 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base applied to plastic-laminate-clad

casework. 4. Section 12 36 23.13 "Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" apply to the Work of this Section.



B. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying requirements.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that casework can be supported and installed as indicated.



B. Shop Drawings: For plastic-laminate-clad casework.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachments to other work including blocking and reinforcements required for installation.

2. Indicate types and sizes of casework. 3. Indicate manufacturer's catalog numbers for casework. 4. Show fabrication details, including types and locations of hardware. 5. Indicate locations of and clearances from adjacent walls, doors, windows, other building components,

and equipment. 6. Apply AWI's Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.



12 35 53 - 2 of 9

C. Keying Schedule: Include schematic keying diagram, and index each key set to unique designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents.

D. Samples: For casework and hardware finishes.

E. Samples for Initial Selection: For casework and hardware finishes.

F. Samples for Verification: For the following:

1. Plastic Laminates: 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish required. a. Provide one Sample applied to core material with specified edge material applied to one edge.

2. Cabinet finishes.



B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI's Quality Certification Program certificates.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: A manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. Submit evidence of at least 5 years’ experience and installations for similar types of projects. Manufacturers must also show evidence of financial stability, plant facilities, catalogs, and specifications.

1.10 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

A. Casework must conform to design, quality of materials, design intent, workmanship and exact performance function of casework components and details specified and implied by manufacturer's reference, and as shown on plans regardless of that manufacturer's "product standards".

B. Certified Product Test Data: Submit Certified Product Test Data in accordance with ANSI A161.1-1980, NEMA LD3-1991, and general static load testing performed and certified by an independent testing agency, covering the following areas of product performance, with these minimum results:

1. Base cabinet construction/racking test: 800 lbs. 2. Cabinet front joint loading test: 425 lbs. 3. Wall cabinet static load test: 2,200 lbs. 4. Drawer front joint loading test: 600 lbs. 5. Drawer construction/static load test: 600 lbs. 6. Cabinet adjustable shelf support device/static load test: 300 lbs. 7. Particleboard screw holding power: 350 lbs.

C. The following performance details are project requirements and must be met:

1. ADA-Americans with Disabilities Act Requirements: The special requirements specified herein shall be met, where specifically indicated on architectural plans as "ADA", or by General Note. To be in compliance with Federal Register Volume 56, No. 144, Rules and Regulations.

2. Lamination System: Doors, finished end panels, and other decorative exterior laminate surfaces shall be composed of minimum 3/4 inch core, laminated exterior with .030 inch high pressure plastic laminate, and interior with .020 inch high pressure cabinet liner. Lamination with hybrid P.V.A. Type III water resistant adhesives. Total thickness 13/16 inch.



12 35 53 - 3 of 9

3. Structural Cabinet Body: Cabinet backs shall be minimum 3/8 inch thick, inset from ear of body, fully housed four sides, and back-shimmed. Provide 3/4 inch thick stiffeners glued and fastened to back/body as specified herein. Back perimeter and stiffeners to be fully sealed with hot melt adhesive.

4. Interior Space: All cabinets shall have clear span interiors. No vertical dividers allowed unless by specified architectural design.

5. Heavy Components: Wall cabinet tops and bottoms, and all bookstack shelves shall be minimum 1 inch thick, for additional load support. Shelves in door cabinets 30 inches wide and over shall be 1 inch thick. Shelves in open cabinets, regardless of width, shall be 1 inch thick.

6. Structural Drawer Body: Drawer body material shall be multi-directional fiberboard with bottom recessed, captured all four sides and sealed with hot melt adhesive. Provide under body stiffener as specified herein. Particleboard bodies and/or surface applied bottoms are not acceptable.

7. Drawer Suspension: Drawer slides shall be self-closing design, epoxy power coated, with positive instop, outstop, and out-keeper. Dynamic (operational) load rating to be minimum 100 lbs. Minimum 150 lb. static load rating.

8. Structural Cabinet Support: Cabinet sub base shall be of a separate and continuous ladder-type platform design leveled and floor mounted prior to cabinet body placement. Material to be exterior grade plywood. No cabinet sides-to-floor will be allowed.

9. Countertop height: with or without cabinet below, not to exceed a height of 34 inches A.F.F., (Above Finished Floor), at a surface depth of 24 inches.

10. 12 inch deep shelving, adjustable or fixed: not to exceed a range from 9 inches A.F.F. to 54 inches A.F.F.

1.11 DEFINITIONS

A. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard will not be permitted.

B. Exposed Portions of Casework: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including bottoms of cabinets more than 48 inches (1200 mm) above floor, and visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors.

1. Ends of cabinets, including those installed directly against walls or other cabinets, shall be considered exposed.

2. Ends of cabinets indicated to be installed directly against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets after installation shall not be considered exposed.

C. Semiexposed Portions of Casework: Surfaces behind opaque doors, such as interiors of cabinets, shelves, dividers, interiors and sides of drawers, and interior faces of doors. Tops of cases 78 inches (1980 mm) or more above floor are defined as semiexposed.

D. Concealed portions of casework include sleepers, web frames, dust panels, and other surfaces not usually visible after installation.

E. Open Interiors: Any open storage unit without solid door or drawer fronts and units with full glass doors.

F. Closed Interiors: Any closed storage unit behind solid door or drawer fronts, glass insert doors, sliding solid doors, and/or acrylic doors.

G. Other Exposed Surfaces: Faces of doors and drawers when closed, tops of cabinets less than 72” above finished floor.

H. Hardwood Plywood: A panel product composed of layers or plies of veneer, or of veners in combination with lumber core, hardboard core, MDF core, or particleboard core joined with adhesive, and faced both front and back with hardwood veneers.

I. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer for installations of units required for this project.



12 35 53 - 4 of 9


A. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of polyethylene film or other suitable material.

1.13 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL

A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Provide one unopened box of each of the following:

a. Vent Louvers

b. Coat Hooks

c. Shelf Clips

d. Locks


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install casework until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during remainder of construction period. Maintain temperature and relative humidity during remainder of construction period in range recommended for Project location by the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

B. Established Dimensions: Where casework is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

C. Field Measurements: Where casework is indicated to fit to existing construction, verify dimensions of existing construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting.

D. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support casework by field measurements before enclosing them, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.15 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of casework that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Delamination of components or other failures of glue bond. b. Warping of components. c. Failure of operating hardware.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Manufactured Plastic Laminate Faced Casework: Subject to requirements, provide LSI Corporation of America (Stevens Industries, Inc), or provide equal products by one of the following:



12 35 53 - 5 of 9

1. Case Systems. 2. TMI Systems Design Corporation. 3. Advanced Cabinet Systems (ACS) 4. AmeriCase

B. Source Limitations: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CASEWORK

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of casework indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. Grade: Custom. 2. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that casework complies with

requirements of grades specified.

B. Product Designations: Drawings indicate configurations of manufactured plastic-laminate-clad casework by referencing designations of Casework Design Series numbering system in the Appendix of the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

C. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard will not be permitted.

1. Furnish all cabinets and casework including tops, splashes and supporting structures and all other miscellaneous items of equipment as listed in the specifications or equipment schedules or as shown on the drawings. Fabricate and deliver to building, unload, unpack, set in place, level and securely fasten and scribe to walls as required; ready for mechanical and electrical connections which will be done as specified under other divisions. All work shall be strictly in accordance with this specification.

2. Holes in counters for insertion of sinks and fixtures will be the responsibility of the casework supplier.

2.3 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD CASEWORK

A. Design: Cabinet construction with the following door and drawer-front style:

1. Flush overlay.

B. Grain Direction for Wood-Grain Plastic Laminate:

1. Doors: Vertical with continuous vertical matching. 2. Drawer Fronts: Vertical with continuous vertical matching. 3. Face Frame Members: Lengthwise. 4. End Panels: Vertical. 5. Bottoms and Tops of Units: Side to side. 6. Aprons: Horizontal.

2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware, General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard satin-finish, commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware.

1. Use threaded metal or plastic inserts with machine screws for fastening to particleboard except where hardware is through-bolted from back side.

B. Butt Hinges: Heavy Duty, Chrome-plated, semiconcealed, five-knuckle institutional hinges complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, with antifriction bearings and rounded tips. Provide two hinges for doors less than 48 inches high, and provide three hinges for doors more than 48 inches high.

C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): ANSI/BHMA A156.9, Type B01602 , self-closing. Provide two hinges for doors less than 48 inches high, and provide three hinges for doors more than 48 inches high.

1. Degrees of Opening: 135 degrees.



12 35 53 - 6 of 9

D. Wire Pulls: Solid aluminum or chrome-plated brass wire pulls, fastened from back with two screws.

1. For sliding doors, provide recessed chrome-plated flush pulls. 2. Provide two pulls for drawers more than 24 inches wide. 3. Length – 4”, 5/16” diameter.

E. Semirecessed Pulls: Plastic. For sliding doors, provide recessed plastic flush-pulls. Provide two pulls for drawers more than 24 inches wide.

F. Door Catches: Nylon-roller spring catch or dual, self-aligning, permanent magnet catch. Provide two catches on doors more than 48 inches high.

G. Door and Drawer Bumpers: Self-adhering, clear silicone rubber.

1. Doors: Provide one bumper at top and bottom of closing edge of each swinging door. 2. Drawers: Provide one bumper on back side of drawer front at each corner.

H. Drawer Slides: ANSI/BHMA A156.9, Type B05091.

1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated, steel ball-bearing slides.

I. Adjustable Shelf Supports: LH-354 Two-pin-locking plastic shelf rests complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.9, Type B04013. Color to blend with selected interior finish.

2.5 MATERIALS

a. Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber: 7 percent for hardwood and 12 percent for softwood.

b. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, particleboard core except where veneer core is indicated.

c. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.

d. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.

e. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.

f. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, Class 1 Tempered.

g. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3.

1) Manufacturers: Provide laminate selections as indicated on the finish plan drawings.

h. Edgebanding for Plastic Laminate: PVC 3mm edgebanding typical, to match adjacent plastic laminate.

i. Edgebanding for Thermoset Decorative Panels: PVC 3mm edgebanding typical, to match adjacent plastic laminate.

2. Colors for other cabinet surfaces, grade GP28, Maximum of one (1) color to be selected per unit face and tow (2) colors for the project.

3. Colors for countertop grades, GP50 and PF42, shall be selected from the current year Plastic Laminate complete solid and pattern offering. A maximum of five (5) colors selections

B. Edging Materials/Colors:

1. 3 mm PVC banding, machine applied with waterproof hot melt adhesive with external edges and outside corners of door and drawer fronts, and countertops, machine profiled to 1/8” radius for safety, buffed and corner radiused for consistent design.



12 35 53 - 7 of 9

2. PVC banding color shall be selected from manufacturer’s full range of colors. Selections shall be made from manufacturer’s full range of colors.

3. PVC Edging sizes as follows unless otherwise indicated:

a. Doors, Drawer Heads and counters shall be 3mm. b. Cabinet sides, floors and fixed shelves shall be 1mm. c. Adjustable Shelves, Drawer boxes, 1mm. d. Melamine Support Brackets, 1mm.

4. Barbed T-edging or laminate self-edge on cabinet components will not be acceptable.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate casework to dimensions, profiles, and details shown.

B. Cabinet Body Construction:

1. Tops and bottoms shall be joined to cabinet ends and internal cabinet components such as fixed horizontals, rails and verticals shall be joined using 10mm diameter industrial grade hardwood dowels, laterally fluted with chamfered ends, securely glued and clamped under pressure during assembly to secure joints and cabinet squareness. Use minimum of six (6) dowels at each joint for 24” deep cabinets and minimum of four (4) dowels at each joint for 12” deep cabinets.

2. Unless specifically indicated, core shall be ¾” thick particleboard. Edging and surface finishes as indicated herein.

3. All undercounter units except sink base units, shall be provided with full sub-top. Sink base units shall be provided with open top, front welded steel/epoxy painted sink rail full width at top front edge concealed behind face rail/doors, split back removable access panels and bottom panel to have CL20 high pressure cabinet liner both faces, color to match interior color. No exceptions will be permitted.

4. All end panels and vertical dividers, except sink base units, shall be prepared to receive adjustable shelf hardware at 32mm (approximately 1-1/4”) centers. Door hinges, drawer slides and pull-out shelves shall mount on line boring to maintain vertical alignment of components and provide for future relocation of doors, drawers, shelves and/or pull-out shelves.

5. All exposed and semi exposed edges of basic cabinet components shall be factory edged with PVC bonding, machine applied with waterproof hot melt adhesive.

6. Adjustable shelf core shall be ¾” thick particleboard up to 30” wide, 1” thick particleboard over 30” wide. 7. Interior Finish, Units with Open Interiors: Melamine Laminate. 8. Interior Finish, Units with Closed Interiors: Melamine Laminate. 9. Exposed Ends: GP28 Decorative Laminate. 10. Wall Unit Bottom: Melamine Laminate. 11. Wall and Tall Unit Tops:

a. Top surface will be laminated with melamine in dove grey, frosty white or light beige to match basic cabinet body color.

12. Balanced construction of all laminated panels is mandatory. Unfinished core stock, even on concealed surfaces, will not be permitted. No exceptions.

C. Tops, General: Provide smooth, clean exposed tops and edges in uniform plane free of defects. Make exposed edges and corners uniformly beveled. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets, formed with continuous drip groove on underside 1/2 inch from edge. No joints closer than 24” either side of sink cutout.

D. Drawers:

1. Sides, back and sub front shall be particleboard, ½” thick, laminated with melamine in dove grey, frosty white or light beige to match basic cabinet body color. The back and sub front are doweled and glued into the sides. Dowels shall be fluted, with chamfered ends and a minimum diameter of 8mm. Top edge is banded with 1mm PVC edging in a matching color.

2. Drawer bottom shall be particleboard, ½” thick, laminated with melamine in dove grey, frosty white or light beige to match basic cabinet body color, screwed directly to the bottom edges of the drawer box. Drawer bottom less than ½” thick will not be permitted.



12 35 53 - 8 of 9

3. Paper storage drawers are constructed similar except retaining hood shall be included at the rear of each drawer. All drawers should have roller guides.

4. Painted finishes on drawer sides and/or bottom will not be permitted.

E. Door/Drawer Fronts:

1. Core for all doors and applied drawer fronts shall be ¾” thick particleboard. All edges shall be finished as indicated herein.

2. Double doors shall be used on all cabinets in excess of 24” wide.

F. Filler Strips: Provide as needed to close spaces between casework and walls, ceilings, and equipment. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as casework.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, location of framing and reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install casework to comply with same quality standard grade as item to be installed.

B. Install casework level, plumb, and true in line; shim as required using concealed shims. Where casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.

C. Base Cabinets: Set cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust subtops within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Align similar adjoining doors and drawers to a tolerance of 1/16 inch. Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform.

D. Wall Cabinets: Hang cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust fronts and bottoms within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Fasten cabinets to hanging strips, masonry, framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in walls and partitions. Align similar adjoining doors to a tolerance of 1/16 inch.

E. Fasten casework to adjacent units and to masonry, framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in walls and partitions to comply with the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

F. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises unless otherwise indicated. Adjust and align hardware so moving parts operate freely and contact points meet accurately. Allow for final adjustment after installation.

G. Adjust operating hardware so doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.


A. Inspections: Provide inspection of installed Work through AWI's Quality Certification Program certifying that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of the Architectural Woodwork Standards for the specified grade.

1. Inspection entity shall prepare and submit report of inspection.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed on completion of installation.



12 35 53 - 9 of 9

B. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.



MAROTTA/MAIN ARCHITECTS SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.16- 1 of 4

SECTION 12 36 61.16 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid surface material countertops. 2. Solid surface material backsplashes. 3. Solid surface material end splashes.


1. Section 22 41 00 "Residential Plumbing Fixtures" for and plumbing fittings.


A. Product Data: For countertop materials.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

1. Show locations and details of joints. 2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Countertop material, 6 inches square. 2. One full-size solid surface material countertop, with front edge and backsplash, 8 by 10 inches, of

construction and in configuration specified.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.


A. Maintenance Data: For solid surface material countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops.



C. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical countertop as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work



A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS

A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Corian. b. Formica Corporation. c. Meganite Inc. d. Or equal as approved by the Professional. e. Wilsonart LLC.

2. Type: Provide Standard type or equal as approved to be the bottom letter. 3. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.

C. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.

2.2 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION

A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

B. Configuration:

1. Front: 1-1/2-inch laminated bullnose. 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner. 3. End Splash: Matching backsplash.

C. Countertops: 1/2-inch thick, solid surface material.

D. Countertops: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material laminated to 3/4-inch- thick particleboard with exposed edges built up with 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material.

E. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material.

F. Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges and backsplashes unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly.




G. Cutouts and Holes:

1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves. a. Provide vertical edges, slightly eased at juncture of cutout edges with top and bottom surfaces

of countertop and projecting 3/16 inch into fixture opening. b. Provide vertical edges, rounded to 3/8-inch radius at juncture of cutout edges with top surface

of countertop, slightly eased at bottom, and projecting 3/16 inch into fixture opening. c. Provide 3/4-inch full bullnose edges projecting 3/8 inch into fixture opening.

2. Counter-Mounted Plumbing Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical.

3. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items.

4. Counter-Mounted Cooktops: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for cooktops. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical.


A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer.

B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates to receive solid surface material countertops and conditions under which countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet, 1/4 inch maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between planes of adjacent units.

B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

C. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets. Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane.

D. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

E. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

1. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and joints are of specified width.



F. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

G. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.

1. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish.

H. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."


214 North Duke Street, Lancaster, Pennsylvania 17602 P 717.393.3211 / F 717.393.3212 www.marottamain.com